T61-A1 1 EBS 2 Knorr BUS 81992984452 ENG

Electrical System
Electronic Brake System (EBS)
Buses/Coaches
2002 | 1 | 2 | 3 4 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12..
Publication no.: System Description

81.99298-4452 T 61-A1
MAN Nutzfahrzeuge Aktiengesellschaft Elektrische Anlage Omnibus

Dachauer Str. 667 oder Postfach 50 06 20 Systembeschreibung T 61-A1
80995 MÜNCHEN 80976 MÜNCHEN - englisch -
Printed in Germany
Electrical System

System Description T 61-A1
Buses/Coaches
81.99298-4452
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
We reserve the right to make modifications in the course of further development
 2002 MAN Nutzfahrzeuge Aktiengesellschaft
Reprinting, copying or translation is not allowed without written permission from MAN
All rights under the copyright law are strictly reserved by MAN
VSWY / HA 04.2002 Übersetzung + Satz: emes GmbH

Friedrichshafen
0.01 - 2 T 61-A1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Table of contents
Electrical system........................................................................................................................... 0
Table of contents.......................................................................................................................... 0.11 - 1
Index............................................................................................................................................. 0.12 - 1
Abbreviations................................................................................................................................ 0.13 - 1
General information...................................................................................................................... 1
Notes on safety ............................................................................................................................ 1.20 - 1
System description....................................................................................................................... 2
Electronic brake system ............................................................................................................... 2.01 - 1
Explanation of the subfunctions ................................................................................................... 2.01 - 1
Features of EBS for buses and coaches ...................................................................................... 2.01 - 1
Operation of the subfunctions ...................................................................................................... 2.01 - 2
Electronic control unit ................................................................................................................... 2.01 - 5
Brake power sensor ..................................................................................................................... 2.01 - 5
Pressure control module (1-channel) ........................................................................................... 2.01 - 5
Speed sensing system ................................................................................................................. 2.01 - 5
Brake wear sensor ....................................................................................................................... 2.01 - 5
ALB sensor, rear axle ................................................................................................................... 2.01 - 5
Function and block diagram ........................................................................................................ 2.01 - 6
Interfaces to other systems .......................................................................................................... 2.01 - 8
Functional description ................................................................................................................. 3

Basic electro-pneumatic concept ................................................................................................. 3.01 - 1
Single-circuit electronic control redundancy ................................................................................. 3.01 - 1
Concept for pressure selection in pressure control module ......................................................... 3.01 - 2
Communication between EBS and CAN databus ........................................................................ 3.01 - 2
Service brake valve with integrated brake power sensor ............................................................. 3.01 - 5
Automatic load-dependent brake, ALB sensor ............................................................................. 3.01 - 8
Speed sensor ............................................................................................................................... 3.01 - 9
Component description................................................................................................................ 4
EBS control unit............................................................................................................................ 4.01 - 1
ALB sensor, rear axle/centre axle and rear axle .......................................................................... 4.05 - 1
Speed sensor ............................................................................................................................... 4.07 - 1
Wiring diagrams............................................................................................................................ 6
Guide to using the wiring diagrams .............................................................................................. 6.01 - 1
Overview, EBS A25/A26/A30 multiplex ........................................................................................ 6.05 - 2
Overview, EBS A25/A26/A30/A34 multiplex - NES ...................................................................... 6.06 - 2
Overview, EBS A03/A13/A33 ....................................................................................................... 6.07 - 2
Overview, EBS A01 ...................................................................................................................... 6.08 - 2
Overview, EBS A04/A32............................................................................................................... 6.09 - 2
Overview, EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486 multiplex .................................................................. 6.10 - 2
Overview, EBS A23/A24/489 multiplex - NES.............................................................................. 6.11 - 2
Overview, EBS R02/R03 multiplex ............................................................................................... 6.12 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A25/A26/A30 multiplex............................................................................... 6.20 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A25/A26/A30/A34 multiplex - NES............................................................. 6.21 - 2
T 61-A1 0.11 - 1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Table of contents
Wiring diagram, EBS A03/A13/A33.............................................................................................. 6.22 - 2

Wiring diagram, EBS A01 ............................................................................................................ 6.23 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A04/A32 ..................................................................................................... 6.25 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486 multiplex......................................................... 6.26 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A23/A24/489 multiplex - NES .................................................................... 6.27 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS R02/R03 multiplex ..................................................................................... 6.28 - 2
Function diagrams ....................................................................................................................... 7

Function diagram, brake EBS A01............................................................................................... 7.20 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS A03/A13/A33 ................................................................................ 7.21 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486 .......................................................... 7.25 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS A23/A24/489 ................................................................................ 7.26 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS R02............................................................................................... 7.27 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS R03............................................................................................... 7.28 - 2
Diagnosis ...................................................................................................................................... 8
Offboard/onboard diagnosis......................................................................................................... 8.10 - 1
Fault display on request ............................................................................................................... 8.10 - 8
Diagnosis button .......................................................................................................................... 8.10 - 11
Flashing code output.................................................................................................................... 8.10 - 12
Checking the functions................................................................................................................. 8.10 - 12
SPN and flashing code list (fault codes) ...................................................................................... 8.10 - 13
SPN fault code description........................................................................................................... 8.11 - 1
0.11 - 2 T 61-A1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Index Section/page
Abbreviations................................................................................................................................ 0.13 - 1
Automatic load-dependent brake, ALB sensor ............................................................................. 3.01 - 8
Basic electro-pneumatic concept ................................................................................................. 3.01 - 1
Brake power sensor ..................................................................................................................... 2.01 - 5
Checking the functions ................................................................................................................. 8.10 - 12
Communication between EBS and CAN databus ........................................................................ 3.01 - 2
Concept for pressure selection in pressure control module ......................................................... 3.01 - 2
Diagnosis button........................................................................................................................... 8.10 - 11
EBS control unit............................................................................................................................ 4.01 - 1
Explanation of the subfunctions ................................................................................................... 2.01 - 1
Fault display on request ............................................................................................................... 8.10 - 8
Features of EBS for buses and coaches ...................................................................................... 2.01 - 1
Flashing code output .................................................................................................................... 8.10 - 12
Function and block diagram ........................................................................................................ 2.01 - 6
Function diagram, brake EBS A01 ............................................................................................... 7.20 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486........................................................... 7.25 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS A23/A24/489................................................................................. 7.26 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS R02 ............................................................................................... 7.27 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS R03 ............................................................................................... 7.28 - 2
Guide to using the wiring diagrams .............................................................................................. 6.01 - 1
Index............................................................................................................................................. 0.12 - 1
Interfaces to other systems .......................................................................................................... 2.01 - 8
Notes on safety ............................................................................................................................ 1.20 - 1
Offboard/onboard diagnosis ......................................................................................................... 8.10 - 1
Operation of the subfunctions ...................................................................................................... 2.01 - 2
Overview, EBS A01 ...................................................................................................................... 6.08 - 2
Overview, EBS A03/A13/A33 ....................................................................................................... 6.07 - 2
Overview, EBS A04/A32............................................................................................................... 6.09 - 2
Overview, EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486 multiplex .................................................................. 6.10 - 2
Overview, EBS A23/A24/489 multiplex - NES.............................................................................. 6.11 - 2
Overview, EBS A25/A26/A30 multiplex ........................................................................................ 6.05 - 2
Overview, EBS A25/A26/A30/A34 multiplex - NES ...................................................................... 6.06 - 2
Overview, EBS R02/R03 multiplex ............................................................................................... 6.12 - 2
Single-circuit electronic control redundancy ................................................................................. 3.01 - 1
Speed sensing system ................................................................................................................. 2.01 - 5
Speed sensor ............................................................................................................................... 3.01 - 9
Speed sensor ............................................................................................................................... 4.07 - 1
SPN and flashing code list (fault codes)....................................................................................... 8.10 - 13
SPN fault code description ........................................................................................................... 8.11 - 1
T 61-A1 0.12 -1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Index Section/page

Wiring diagram, EBS A03/A13/A33.............................................................................................. 6.22 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A04/A32 ..................................................................................................... 6.25 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486 multiplex......................................................... 6.26 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A23/A24/489 multiplex - NES .................................................................... 6.27 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A25/A26/A30 multiplex .............................................................................. 6.20 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A25/A26/A30/A34 multiplex - NES ............................................................ 6.21 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS R02/R03 multiplex ..................................................................................... 6.28 - 2
0.12 -2 T 61-A1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Abbreviations As of: 11.01
a Acceleration
ABE General operating permit
ABS Anti-lock brake system
ABV Anti-skid system
AC Air conditioning
ACC Adaptive cruise control
ACK Autocheck
ADC Analog-digital converter
ADR International agreement for the transport of dangerous goods
AGB Automatic road speed limiter
AGND Analog ground
AGR Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)
AHK Trailer coupling
AHV Trailer brake valve
ALB Automatic load-dependent brake
AMA Antenna mast system
ANH Trailer/semitrailer
AS Automatic gearbox
ASD Trailer socket
ASM Trailer control module
ASR Anti-spin regulator
ASV Trailer control valve
ATC Automatic temperature control
ATF Automatic transmission fluid
AU Statutory exhaust emission test
AV Outlet valve
AVS Automatic gear preselection
BA Operator's manual
BBA Service brake system
BBV Service brake valve
BKR Brake power regulator
BUGH Front heater
BV Backup valve
BVA Brake wear indicator
BVS Brake wear sensor
BVV Brake wear sensor supply
BW German Army
BWG Brake power sensor
BZ Brake cylinder
CAN Controller area network

CAN-H CAN-high data line
CAN-L CAN-low data line
CATS Computer-assisted testing and diagnostic system
CCVS Cruise control vehicle speed
CKD Completely knocked down
CNG Compressed natural gas
CPU Central processing unit
CRT Continuously regenerating trap
CS Comfort shift
DAHL Roof ventilator

DBR Sustained-action brake relay
DECKE Cover (for doors)
DF Speed sensor
DFÜ Data transmission
DIA Diagnosis and information display
T 61-A1 0.13 - 1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Abbreviations
DIAK Diagnosis, K-line (data line)

DIAL Diagnosis, L-line (interrogation line)
DIAR Diagnosis, further interrogation
DIN German industrial standard
DKE Throttle valve increase (ASR control)
DKH Roof duct heating
DKL Roof flaps
DKR Throttle valve reduction (reduction request from ASR to EDC/EMS)
DKV Throttle valve specification (load sensor signal from pedal value sensor, EDC/EMS)
DLB Compressed air brake system
DM Diagnostic message
DNR Drive Neutral Reverse (selector lever switch for automatic)
DPF Diesel particulate filter
DRM Pressure control module
DS Pressure sensor
DSV Pressure control valve
DV Throttle valve
DWA Anti-theft warning system
DZG Speed sensor
DZM Rev counter
EBS Electronic brake system

ECAM Electronically controlled air management
ECAS Electronically controlled air suspension
ECE Emergency shut-off to ECE 36
ECU Electronic control unit
EDC Electronic diesel control
EDM Electronic diesel consumption meter
EDR Maximum speed governor
EEC Electronic engine controller
EEPROM Electrically erasable and programmable read-only memory
EFR Electronic shock absorber control (ESAC)
EFS Electric driver's seat
EHAB Electro-hydraulic shut-off device
ELAB Electrical shut-off device
ELF Electronic air suspension
EMS Electronic throttle control (ETC)
EMV Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC)
EOL End-of-line (programming)
EP Injection pump
ER Engine retarder (engine brake)
ESAC Electronic shock absorber control
ESP Electronic stability program
ESR Electric sun-blind
EST Electronic control unit
EV Inlet valve
EVB Exhaust valve brake
FAP Driver's area

FAQ Frequently asked questions
FBA Parking brake system
FDR Dynamic handling control
FFR Vehicle management computer (VMC)
FGB Road speed limiter (RSL)
FGR Road speed governor (RSG)
FHS Cab
FIN Vehicle identification number (VIN)
FM Vehicle management
FMI Failure mode identification
0.13 - 2 T 61-A1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Abbreviations
FMR Vehicle/engine management

FOC Front omnibus chassis (bus/coach chassis with front-mounted engine)
FSCH Windscreen heater
FSG Ground reinforcement system
FSH Window/mirror heating
FTW Driver's partition
FUNK Radio communication unit
FZA Destination system
GDK Controlled diesel catalytic converter

GEN Alternator
GET Gearbox
GGVS Regulations for the transport of hazardous goods
GND Ground
GP Gearbox planetary gear group (range-change box)
GS Gearbox control
GV Gearbox splitter gear group (splitter box)
HA Rear axle
HBA Auxiliary brake system
HGB Maximum road speed limiter
HGS Hydraulic gearshift
HLUE Hydrostatic fan
HOC Rear omnibus chassis (bus/coach chassis with rear-mounted engine)
HSS Highside switch
HST Main control panel
HU Main inspection
Hz Hertz (number of cycles per second)
HZA Bus stop indicator system
HZG Auxiliary rpm sensor
IBEL Interior lighting

IBIS Integrated on-board information system
IC Integrated circuit
ID Identification
IMR Integrated mechanical relay (starter control)
INA Information indicator (e.g. check lamp)
IR Individual control (ABS)
IRM Modified individual control (ABS)
ISO International Standards Organisation
IWZ Incremental angle/time measuring system
KBZ Combination brake cylinder

KFH Fuel filter heater
KITAS Kienzle intelligent tachograph sensor
KLI Air-conditioning system
KNEEL Kneeling
KSM Customer-specified control module
KSW Customer's special request
KWP Key word protocol (protocol for MAN-cats diagnosis)
LBH Air reservoir

LCD Liquid crystal display
LDA Manifold-pressure compensator (boost control)
LDF Boost pressure sensor
LDS Air spring/damper system
LED Light emitting diode
LF Air suspension
LGS Lane guard system
T 61-A1 0.13 - 3
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Abbreviations
LL Idling speed
LLA Idling speed increase
LLR Idling speed control
LNG Liquefied natural gas
LOE Steering oil monitor
LPG Liquefied petroleum gas
LWR Headlight beam regulator
M-TCO Modular EU tachograph

MAB Solenoid valve shut-off (engine shut-off by high-pressure solenoid valve in injection pump)
MAN-cats MAN computer-assisted testing and diagnostic system
MAR Solenoid valve shut-off relay (redundant engine shut-off relay)
MDB Engine speed range
MES Fuel metering control
ML Midline
MMI Man-machine interface
MOTB Engine brake
MP Engine power box (cable duct on engine block)
MR Engine governor - ASR
MSG Engine control unit (EDC)
MV Solenoid valve
MZ Diaphragm cylinder
n Speed (rpm)
NA Power take-off (PTO)
NBF Needle movement sensor
NES New electronic structure
NFZ Commercial vehicle
NLA Trailing axle
NSL Rear fog lamp
NSW Front fog lamps
OBDU On-board diagnostic unit

OC Occurrence count (errors/faults)
OEAB Oil separator
OENF Oil top-up
p Pressure
PBM Pulse breadth modulation (à also see PWM)
PLM Programmable logic module
PSG Pump control unit (EDC)
PTO Power take-off
PWM Pulse width modulation (à also see PBM)
RA Repair manual
RAH Interior heating
RAM Random access memory
RAS Rear axle steering
RAS-EC Rear axle steering with electronic control
RDRA Tyre pressure control system
RDS Radio data system
RET Retarder
RKL Priority vehicle light
RLV Relay valve
RME Rape seed oil methyl ester (biodiesel)
ROM Read only memory
0.13 - 4 T 61-A1
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Abbreviations
SA Special equipment
SAE Society of Automotive Engineers
SAMT Semi-automatic mechanical transmission
SB Service outlet
sec Second
SER Series (production)
SG Control unit
SH Select-high control (ABS)
SKD Semi-knocked down
SL Select-low control (ABS)
SML Side marker light
SPN Suspect parameter number
STA Engine start/stop
SWR Headlight cleaning system
t Time
TC Traction control
TCM Trailer control module
TCO Tachograph
TKU Technical customer document
TMC Traffic message channel
TRS Technical road transport directives
TSC Torque speed control (braking torque)
TUER Door control
UBat Battery voltage

UDS Crash recorder
v Velocity/vehicle speed
VA Front axle
VG Transfer case
VLA Leading axle
WA Maintenance manual
WAB Water separator
WLE Swap-body unit
WR Warning relay
WS Position sensor
WSK Torque converter and clutch unit
z Braking rate/deceleration
ZBR Central on-board computer
ZBRO Central on-board bus computer
ZDR Intermediate speed governor (ISG)
ZE Central electrical system (CES)
ZR Central computer
ZS Central lubrication
ZUSH Auxiliary heater
ZWS Time-based maintenance system
λ Slip
µ Coefficient of friction
µC Microcontroller (microprocessor)
T 61-A1 0.13 - 5
GENERAL INFORMATION
Notes on safety
This survey presents a summary of the important regulations listed according to major topics. The intention
is to provide the knowledge needed to avoid accidents which could lead to injury, damage and
environmental pollution.
Additional information is given in the operator’s manual for the vehicle.
Important:
Accidents may happen in spite of all precautionary measures having been taken. In such an eventuality,
obtain immediate medical assistance from a doctor. This is particularly important if the accident
involves skin contact with corrosive acid, fuel penetration under the skin, scalding by hot oil, antifreeze
spraying into eyes, etc.
Regulations for preventing accidents leading to injury to personnel.
Only authorised technical personnel are entitled to perform inspection, adjustment and repair work.
• Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

• Support the frame when working on the pneumatic or spring suspension system.
• Secure units during their removal.
• Only authorised personnel are permitted to start and operate an engine.

Do not approach moving parts of a running engine too closely and do not wear
baggy clothing.
• Do not touch an engine with your bare hands when it is at operating temperature.
Danger of burns!
• Keep the area around the engine, ladders and steps free of oil and grease.
Accidents caused by slipping can have very serious consequences.
• Only use tools that are in perfect condition. Damaged or widened spanners can
slip: Risk of injury!
• No-one is allowed to stand under an engine suspended from a crane hook. Keep
all lifting tackle in good condition.
• Collect any brake fluid that leaks out. Treat brake fluid as hazardous waste!
Comply with the safety regulations for preventing environmental pollution.
• Brake fluid is poisonous! Do not allow it to come into contact with food or open
wounds.
• Do not open the coolant circuit until the engine has cooled down. Refer to the
"Maintenance and care jobs" section in the Operator’s Manual if you have to
open the circuit when the engine is warm.
• Do not attempt to tighten, loosen or open pipelines and hoses (e.g. in lubrication
circuit, coolant circuit or any subsequent hydraulic oil circuit) whilst they are
pressurised. Fluid spraying out represents an injury hazard!
• Do not hold your hands under the jet of fuel when checking the injector nozzles.
Do not inhale fuel vapours.
T 61-A1 1.20 - 1
GENERAL INFORMATION
• Always disconnect the batteries before working on the electrical system.

Important! Oxyhydrogen gas may form in enclosed battery boxes. When the
batteries are disconnected, this gas may be ignited by sparks produced by other
continuously operating consumers, the tachograph etc. that cannot be shut down.
Blow compressed air through the battery box before disconnecting the batteries!
• Only tow-start the vehicle if the batteries are connected (minimum charge 40%)!
Do not use a boost-charger to jump-start the vehicle! Always disconnect the
positive and negative leads before boost-charging batteries!
• Disconnect the batteries and recharge them every 4 weeks if the vehicle is not in
use.
Caution! Battery acid is poisonous and corrosive. Battery gases are explosive.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions when handling batteries.
• Measure voltage only using a suitable measurement device!
The input resistance of the measurement device must be at least 10 MΩ.
• The ignition must be switched off before the wiring harness plugs of the
electronic control units are disconnected or connected up!
When performing electric welding work, connect up the "ANTIZAP SERVICE
MONITOR" protective device (MAN item number 80.78010.0001) or the improved
SES-1 version (MAN item number 80.78010.0002) in accordance with the
instructions provided with the device.
If this device is not available, disconnect the batteries and join the positive cable to
the negative cable in order to make a conductive connection.
Always earth the welding equipment as close as possible to the welding area. Do not
lay the cables to the welding equipment in parallel to electrical cables in the vehicle.
Refer to the "Guidelines for Welders" for further safety precautions.
The chassis is not intended for use as an earth return!
• If attachments are to be fitted to the vehicle (e.g. a loading tailgate), additional
earth (ground) lines with an adequate cross-section must be fitted as well.
Otherwise the earth connection may be created along wire cables, wiring
harnesses, gearbox shafts, gears etc. Severe damage could result.
• If paint spraying is to be carried out, do not expose the electronic components

to high temperatures (max. 95 °C) for more than brief periods; a time of up to 2
hours is permissible at a maximum of 85 °C. Disconnect the batteries.
Plastic tubes (polyamide)

Important! – Danger of damage and fire!
• The warning sign opposite is located below the door lock on the co-driver's door.
It warns you against welding or drilling near to plastic tubes.
1.20 - 2 T 61-A1
GENERAL INFORMATION
Limited liability for accessories and parts
In your own interests, you are recommended to use only accessories expressly approved by MAN and
genuine MAN parts. The reliability, safety and suitability of these parts and accessories have been
determined specifically for MAN vehicles. Despite constant market observation, we cannot judge the
aspects of other products, nor can we accept responsibility for them – even if they have been officially
approved by the German TÜV technical inspection authorities or some other official body.
Attachments and special bodies

You must comply with the safety instructions and regulations issued by the body maker in question if
attachments or special bodies are fitted.
Taking out of operation or putting into storage

The special measures described in MAN Works Standard M 3069 Part 3 apply if buses or trucks are to be
withdrawn from service or stored for a period longer than 3 months.
T 61-A1 1.20 - 3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
EBS is the abbreviation for the entire electronic brake system incorporating the following subfunctions:
EPB Electro Pneumatic Brake
ABS Anti-lock Brake System
ASR Anti-Spin Regulator
EBS comprises a purely pneumatic dual circuit and an overlaid electro-pneumatic single circuit. The
structure of the underlaid pneumatic dual circuit is essentially the same as that of a conventional brake
system.
Electronic brake pressure control is backed up by a pneumatic control circuit (back-up circuit) which is
automatically activated in the event of electrical failure.
The parking brake is a conventional, mechanically actuated system with pneumatic signal transmission.
Explanation of the subfunctions
− EPB executes the electronic brake pressure control. Without ABS, this continues until full pressure
modulation. Auxiliary functions influence electronic brake pressure control, resulting in variable brake
pressure distribution to the brake cylinders.
− ABS controls the brake pressure if the wheels start to lock and deactivates the sustained-action brake.
− ASR controls the brake pressure on driven axles if the wheels start to spin and/or reduces the
engine power.
Features of EBS for buses and coaches
− Conventional parking brake system (FBA): Mechanically actuated, with pneumatic signal transmission.
− Service brake system (BBA): Brake system electronically controlled by the single-circuit vehicle electrical
system, with dual-circuit pneumatic back-up circuit.
− 24-volt vehicle electrical system.
− Reservoir pressure up to 12.5 bar.
− Brake cylinder pressure up to 10 bar.
− EBS control unit with CAN data transfer:
Drive train CAN databus - EBS control unit to other systems in the vehicle.
Brake CAN databus - to the pressure control modules.
− Single-channel pressure control modules with integrated electronic unit.
− Dual-channel pressure control module with integrated electronic unit.
− Speed sensors and brake wear sensors are connected to the pressure control modules (single-channel
pressure control modules, dual-channel pressure control module) mounted near the wheels.
− ASR function with brake and engine controller (via drive train CAN databus).
− Additional function switch (e.g. ASR spin threshold increase).
− Automatic load-dependent brake (ALB) integrated in electro-pneumatic brake (EPB).
− EOL-programmable system configuration and pressure curves based on individual optimisation criteria
(even application of all wheel brakes, pressure characteristics, brake wear, even adhesion, maximum
deceleration).
− Brake wear control.
− Brake wear function indicator.
− R02 and R03 buses and coaches: Diagnosis with MAN-cats II using 37-pole diagnosis socket X200.
All other buses and coaches: Diagnosis with MAN-cats I using 37-pole diagnosis socket X200 or with
flashing code using plug connector X202.
T 61-A1 2.01 - 1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Operation of the subfunctions
Description as per function and wiring diagram (see page 2.01 - 6).
Driving position
The dual-circuit pneumatic back-up brake circuit is ready for operation when the ignition switch is not
actuated ("off" position) and there is sufficient compressed air available (see section on braking using
back-up circuit). All the solenoid valves in the brake system are de-energised and adopt their basic
positions by mechanical means (springs).
The EBS control unit (1) starts operating after the ignition switch is actuated. Providing there are no faults,
EBS is activated when the brake pedal is released. EBS is supplied from the single-circuit vehicle
electrical system. All the solenoid valves in the brake system are de-energised when the brake is not
actuated.
Braking with the service brake system
Electronically controlled braking (EPB)
The service brake valve (15) is actuated. The brake power sensor integrated in the service brake valve
sends an electrical signal to the EBS control unit (1). This is generated into a brake pressure setpoint in
line with EOL specifications. The desired pressures generated in the EBS control unit are sent to the
pressure control modules (7, 12, 18) via the brake CAN databus. These modules automatically control the
brake pressure for the series-connected brake cylinders.
The desired pressures sent from the EBS control unit to the pressure control modules (7, 12, 18) are
adapted depending on the axle load. In order to determine the axle load-dependent desired pressures, a
value for the axle load is picked up at the air suspension, e.g. by a pressure sensor (11), and the
measured value is sent to the EBS control unit.
Braking via back-up circuit
The service brake valve (15) modulates two pneumatic brake pressures in the vehicle, irrespective of the
brake power sensor electrical signal. These are sent to the pressure control modules (7, 12, 18) in the
vehicle.
In the case of electronically controlled braking, the pneumatic brake pressure is held as "back-up" at the
pressure control modules.
Braking is via the back-up circuit (without "back-up" at the pressure control module) when
− the ignition switch is in "off" position.

− the EBS control unit does not send an electrical setpoint to individual or all pressure control modules.
− the EBS control unit has shut down individual or all pressure control modules following detection of a
fault.
The solenoid valves in the pressure control modules (7, 12, 18) are not energised when braking occurs
via the back-up circuit. They allow the brake pressure output from the service brake valve (15) and the
brake pressure at the control input of the pressure control module to the relay valve in the pressure
control module. These then proportionally supply a pressure from the connected supply line into the brake
cylinders.
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
The speed sensors (5, 9, 13, 17) are connected at the inputs of the pressure control modules (7, 12, 18).
The signals are forwarded to the EBS control unit (1) via the brake CAN databus. The control unit
determines a vehicle reference speed and other variables which are then forwarded to the pressure
control modules, again via the brake CAN databus.
2.01 - 2 T 61-A1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
ABS during electro-pneumatic brake operation (EPB with electrical setpoint)
Each pressure control module reduces the brake pressure in relation to the specified nominal pressure in
its control channel, in accordance with a permitted slip value.
ABS and sustained-action brake (if fitted)
The sustained-action brake relay output at the control unit (A402 pin X1/16) and the "ABS active"
information in the EBC1 message on CAN J1939 indicate whether ABS is active. The signals are set:
− During service brake operation with ABS
− When spin is increased without the service brake being actuated
The sustained-action brake can be shut off with these signals during ABS operation.
Control process for vehicles-ABS
Four control strategies are available in the case of EBS. These take effect depending on the combination
of pressure control module, speed sensor and EOL programming.
− Individual control (IR)

− Modified individual control (IRM)
− Select-low control (SL)
− Select-smart control (SSM)
Individual control (IR)
The brake pressure in a control channel is individually controlled in accordance with the rotating
characteristics of its sensed wheel. In the event of different coefficients of friction on the left/right of the
road, the adapted but different brake powers create a yawing moment around the vertical axis. In order to
enable control of the vehicle reactions whilst braking, the control process is used predominantly on non-
steering axles.
Modified individual control (IRM)
The brake pressure in two control channels is individually controlled in accordance with the rotating
characteristics of its sensed wheels. However, the maximum possible brake pressure on the non-locking
wheel is limited in relation to the wheel which is already being ABS-controlled. Yawing moments are kept
low without causing any considerable increase in braking distance. Used predominantly on steering axles
(axle load-dependent).
Select-low control (SL)
The brake pressure in one control channel is controlled depending on the rotating characteristics of two
sensed wheels. The brake pressure is adjusted to the sensed wheel which first shows a tendency to lock
(low wheel is selected). The transmissible braking power is not utilised on the wheel running at a high
coefficient of friction. With SL, the influence on vehicle stability is positive, the influence on braking
distance negative.
Used on single-channel-controlled axles (e.g. steering trailing axle) or side-specific SL.
Select-smart control (SSM)
The brake pressure in one control channel is controlled depending on the rotating characteristics of two
sensed wheels. In the event of different coefficients of friction on the sensed wheels, intelligent evaluation
enables a higher brake pressure than in the case of SL. This increases the average braking power. Short
locking phases on the wheel running at low coefficient of friction (low wheel) may occur during phases
involving Select-high (SH) control.
Used on single-channel-controlled axles or side-based SSM.
T 61-A1 2.01 - 3
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Anti-spin regulator (ASR)
If both the driven wheels spin when the vehicle starts off and accelerates, the ECU recognises this from
the difference in speed between the driven and non-driven wheels and reduces the engine torque (engine
controller).
If the coefficient of friction on the left is not equal to the coefficient of friction on the right (µ-split), only the
wheel running at the lower coefficient of friction spins in most cases. The spinning wheel is braked by the
ASR brake controller. The drive torque can now take effect on the wheel running at the higher coefficient
of friction. In this way, ASR acts as an automatic differential lock.
Switch off the ASR when performing tests on dynamometers/test stands.
ASR engine controller
If the driven wheels are spinning evenly, the engine drive torque is reduced until the average rotating
speed of the driven rear axle wheels is slightly higher than that of the non-driven front axle wheels. The
EBS control unit outputs the reduction signal required for the Electronic Diesel Control (EDC) via CAN
SAE J1939.
The engine controller can be activated in all road speed ranges.
Communication with the engine control unit

Communication is via CAN databus to SAE J1939.
Off-road ASR
Under certain off-road driving conditions, the spin can be varied by pressing the ASR off-road button.
Activation of this special state is indicated to the driver by the ASR info. check lamp (information indicator)
on the instrument panel (permanently lit or flashing, depending on EOL configuration) or, as an icon, the
information "ABS off-road switch active" is set in the EBC1 message from CAN J1939. The function is
deactivated by pressing the button again or switching the ignition "OFF".
Automatic tyre compensation
The system includes an automatic tyre compensation feature. Following a wheel change, it may be that
the ASR engine regulator is activated before tyre compensation is complete.
This can be cancelled by pressing the ASR off-road button. After a few minutes of driving without braking
on a straight road, the adaptation is complete and ASR off-road can be switched off again.
ASR brake controller
When one wheel starts to spin, the spinning wheel is braked gradually and checked by pressure and
speed sensors. The braking effect reduces the speed of the spinning wheel whilst the speed of the driven
wheel increases as a result of the drive torque. The speeds of the driven wheels are thus synchronised.
The brake controller is not activated at speeds above 40 km/h. However, if it is already active at low road
speeds during acceleration, an appropriate control sequence allows it to remain activated until the next
gear change, even at speeds above 40 km/h. The EBS control unit does not determine the thermal load
on the wheel brakes due to the ASR brake controller. Possible overload during prolonged ASR operation
should be avoided by starting off in an appropriate manner.
If the supply pressure is too low in one of the brake circuits, the ASR brake controller is shut off after one
second. This is why the EBS control unit reads in the voltage potential of the red warning light or the
supply pressure information via CAN J1939 message "Supply Pressure".
2.01 - 4 T 61-A1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Components
− Electronic control unit

The electronic control unit (A402) is used for controlling and monitoring the electronically
controlled brake system. The voltage supply comes from the central electrical system.
Data is transferred
− to other systems via the "drive train" CAN databus
− to the pressure control modules in the vehicle via the "brake" CAN databus
The control unit is EOL-programmed (end of line). At the end of the line, the vehicle manufacturer
inputs vehicle-specific parameters alongside the already entered system manufacturer parameters.
The entered parameters can be checked – or changed if necessary – using the MAN-cats diagnostic
system.
− Brake power sensor

The brake power sensor (B337) is integrated in the service brake valve. The voltage is supplied by the
EBS control unit (A402).
− Pressure control module (1-channel)

A single-channel pressure control module with integrated electronic unit (Y262/Y263) is installed on
the left and right of the front axle. The voltage is supplied by the EBS control unit (A402). The data is
transferred from the pressure control modules to the EBS control unit via the "brake" CAN databus.
− Pressure control module (2-channel)

A 2-channel pressure control module with integrated electronic unit (Y264) is installed on the rear axle.
Buses and coaches with one centre axle and one rear axle have one 2-channel pressure control
module per axle, namely pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) on the centre axle (2nd axle) and
pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) on the rear axle (3rd axle).
The voltage is supplied by the EBS control unit (A402). The data is transferred from the pressure
control module to the EBS control unit via the "brake" CAN databus.
− Speed sensing system

The speed sensing system consists of a toothed pulse wheel and an inductive speed sensor (B119,
B120, B121 and B122; additionally B223 and B224 in the case of buses and coaches with centre axle).
The speed sensors are electrically connected to the pressure control modules.
When the wheel rotates, an alternating voltage is created in the speed sensor, the frequency of which
is proportional to the wheel speed.
− Brake wear sensor

Each pressure control module on the front axle is fitted with one sensor (B332/B333) whilst the
pressure control modules for the centre axle or rear axles each have two sensors (B334/B335 - centre
axle or 1st rear axle and B388/B389 - 2nd rear axle) per axle connected.
The sensor is electrically connected to the pressure control module.
Each sensor is only energised during braking, with the exception of the voltage supplied for
initialisation after the ignition switch is switched "ON". Once braking is complete, the electrical
signals are recorded in the pressure control modules.
Data are transferred via the "brake" CAN databus.
− ALB sensor, rear axle/centre axle and rear axle

The ALB sensor
− B336 - for buses and coaches with one or two rear axles
− B503 and B504 - for buses and coaches with centre axle and rear axle
has the task of converting a physical variable such as pressure into a voltage.
In terms of electrical connections:
− sensor B336 is connected to the pressure control module (Y264) in the case of buses and coaches
with one or two rear axles
− sensor B503 is connected to the 2nd axle pressure control module (Y353) in the case of buses and
coaches with centre axle
− sensor B504 is connected to the 3rd axle pressure control module (Y354) in the case of buses and
coaches with centre axle.
− Axles with air suspension (pressure sensor)

The pneumatic port is connected to the compressed air line which leads to the air bellows.
T 61-A1 2.01 - 5
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Function and wiring diagram (e.g. A25/A26/A30 multiplex)
Key
_____ pneumatic lines

_ _ _ electrical lines
Position Device no. Designation

1 A402 Control unit, EBS
2 X200 Plug connection, 37-pole, diagnosis (MAN-cats)
3 X202 Plug connection, 4-pole, ABS/ASR/EBS, diagnosis (flashing code)
4 B334 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right
5 B122 ABS sensor, rear axle, right
6 B388 Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right
7 G67.303/Y264 Pressure control module, rear axle
8 B389 Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left
9 B121 ABS sensor, rear axle, left
10 B335 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left
11 B336 ALB sensor, rear axle (pressure sensor)
12 G67.302/Y263 Pressure control module, front axle, left
13 B119 ABS sensor, front axle, left
14 B333 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left
15 G7.303/B337 Service brake valve with integrated brake power sensor
16 B332 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right
17 B120 ABS sensor, front axle, right
18 G67.302/Y262 Pressure control module, front axle, right
2.01 - 6 T 61-A1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Function and wiring diagram (e.g. A25/A26/A30 multiplex)
T 61-A1 2.01 - 7
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Interfaces to other systems
Thanks to its integration in the CAN databus, EBS can be networked with other systems.
Data is transferred between the individual systems via the serial "drive train" CAN databus (T-CAN).
Buses and coaches A20, A21, A22, A23, A24, A25, A26, A30 and A35 (multiplex)
The following graphic refers to buses and coaches A25, A26 and A30, for example.
Basis CAN 1 Multiplex line 1 databus Basis CAN 2 Multiplex line 2 databus
I-CAN Instrumentation databus K-CAN Body databus
T-CAN Drive train databus
A561 Door control unit with K-CAN terminator A402 Electronic brake system
A300 Node, instrument panel A146 Gearbox control
A360 Multiplex central computer ZBRO with A142 Electronic diesel injection with
terminators, basis CAN, I-CAN, K-CAN terminator, T-CAN
A411 Multiplex node, front left 1.1 A421 Multiplex node, front right 2.1
A413 Multiplex node, front, control units 1.3 A423 Multiplex node, vehicle middle 2.3
A415 Multiplex node, ceiling, front 1.5 A424 Multiplex node, IBIS 2.4
A418 Multiplex node, rear right 1.8 A425 Multiplex node, rear 3 2.5
A427 Multiplex node, trailer 2.7
A428 Multiplex node, rear left 2.8
R155 Terminator, T-CAN
R195 Terminator, front, basis-CAN 1 R197 Terminator, front, basis-CAN 2
R196 Terminator, rear, basis-CAN 1 R198 Terminator, rear, basis-CAN 2
2.01 - 8 T 61-A1
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
Buses and coaches R02 and R03 (multiplex)
A408 Tachograph with A144 Control, retarder/Intarder

terminator, I-CAN
A435 Electronic diesel injection with A143 Electronic air suspension/
terminator, M-CAN electronic shock absorber control
A403 Vehicle management computer with A330 Gearbox control, Tipmatic AS-Tronic
terminators, M-CAN and T-CAN
A360 Multiplex, central computer A407 Instrumentation
A302 Central computer 2 with A551 Drive module, oil level sensor
terminator, I-CAN
A402 Electronic brake system A409 Electronically controlled air management with
terminator, T-CAN
A312 Customer-specified module
Basis CAN 1 CAN databus, multiplex line 1 I-CAN CAN databus, instrumentation
Basis CAN 2 CAN databus, multiplex line 2 M-CAN CAN databus, engine management
T-CAN CAN data bus, drive train
A411 Multiplex node, front left 1.1 A421 Multiplex node, front right 2.1
A413 Multiplex node, control units 1.3 A422 Multiplex node 2.2
A417 Multiplex node 1.7 A423 Multiplex node, vehicle centre 2.3
A418 Multiplex node, rear right 1.8 A428 Multiplex node, rear left 2.8
R195 Terminator, front, basis-CAN 1 R197 Terminator, front, basis-CAN 2

R196 Terminator, rear, basis-CAN 1 R198 Terminator, rear, basis-CAN 2
T 61-A1 2.01 - 9
FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
The EBS (electronic brake system) helps you keep better control of the vehicle in critical situations such as
bad weather, slippery roads, downhill gradients, tight bends or obstacles that suddenly appear.
The EBS controls the compressed air in the brake cylinders of the brake system by means of the pressure
control module solenoid valves. The EBS control unit co-ordinates the signals from the service brake valve
and pressure control modules.
The brake pressure signals – now electrical signals – are transmitted to all the pressure control modules via
the CAN databus.
The electronically controlled brake pressure build-up and reduction allows fast and simultaneous braking on
all axles as well as quick release of the brake. This set-up optimises the braking effect on all wheels whilst
the more uniform brake wear results in brake lifetimes that are up to 20% longer.
The pneumatic control circuit (back-up circuit) automatically ensures safe braking of the vehicle in the event
of electronic brake pressure control failure.
The EBS control unit co-ordinates all the higher-level functions such as brake management with ABS, ASR
and the automatic load-dependent brake (ALB).
Components fitted next to each other (sensors, valves, electronic control unit) form a single assembly: the
pressure control module.
Basic electro-pneumatic concept

The EBS is based on a conventional dual-circuit service brake system.
The electronic brake system is applied on the basic brake system and receives its electrical power from the
vehicle electrical circuit.
If no EBS functions are active, the service brakes operate through the safe "pneumatic back-up brake
circuit". The brakes also operate through this back-up circuit if EBS malfunctions occur.
Single-circuit electronic control redundancy

The computer core (in the control unit) contains two redundantly arranged microcontrollers (µC).
The control unit performs a self-test after the ignition is switched "ON". Each pressure control module is
then individually controlled by both microcontrollers and energised. Communication via the CAN databus is
then initiated. The control unit recognises the installation position of the pressure control modules in the
EBS from the activation sequence. This means that the pressure control modules can be activated or
deactivated as necessary. The chassis earth of the pressure control modules from the power supply is
routed into the control unit for monitoring and for warning lamp activation redundancy.
Key:
1 Control unit
2 Brake power sensor
3 Other systems
4 Ignition switch (15)
5 Battery master switch
6 Voltage supply (30)
7 Alternator
8 Ground (31)
9 Control unit ground (31)
10 Pressure control module ground
(31)
11 Load disconnecting relay
12 Pressure control module,
front axle, left
front axle, right
rear axle
15 Trailer control module
(not fitted)
T 61-A1 3.01 - 1
The brake power sensor sends an electrically redundant signal to the EBS control unit. Electric braking is
only initiated if both signals indicate that activation is permitted.
The input signals from the brake power sensor and from other components in both microcontrollers are
processed in the EBS control unit. The results are then compared. If this comparison proves positive, one
of the microcontrollers informs each pressure control module or pair of pressure control modules about the
individually applied brake pressure via the CAN databus. One of the microcontrollers records and both of
the microcontrollers check the CAN databus feedback.
Concept for pressure selection in pressure control module

There is an independent pressure control circuit integrated in each pressure control module.
Each pressure control module has 4 components:
An electronic control unit with a microcontroller, solenoid valves, a relay
valve and a pressure sensor for measuring the actual applied pressure.
There is normally a corresponding CAN setpoint and a pneumatic brake pressure at the pressure control
module during braking. The electrically applied pressure is forwarded to the brake cylinder. The pneumatic
pressure is forwarded to the brake cylinder if the electrical section is switched off.
Selection when pneumatic supply is available can generally be described as follows:
− The brake cylinder pressure is controlled based on the electrical setpoint. If the pressure control module
is supplied with power and the CAN setpoint is > 0, then the pneumatic brake pressure is blocked.
− The brake cylinder pressure comes from the pneumatic back-up circuit if there is not enough power
supplied or if the CAN setpoint is either 0 or does not exist.
Communication between EBS and CAN databus
Sensors which measure speed and brake wear on the wheels are directly connected to the pressure
control modules. The electronic control unit integrated in the pressure control module processes and
conditions all the information. The pressure control modules communicate with the EBS control unit via the
CAN databus.
Higher-level sensor functions such as axle load – which are provided in the control unit – are used for all
brake pressure control circuits as well as for other systems such as the electronically controlled air
suspension. As soon as the service brake valve is actuated, electrical and pneumatic signals are made
available. If the valves are de-energised, the pneumatic control signals take effect via the back-up circuit.
In this instance, all the pressure control modules are mechanically safeguarded in a "safety" operating
position.
3.01 - 2 T 61-A1
Electronic control unit
The EBS control unit centrally co-ordinates the entire EBS and communicates with other systems such as
the electronic diesel control (EDC) or the gearbox control unit.
Voltage supply
When voltage is supplied, a filter in the "voltage supply" module protects against electrical faults at terminal
15 and terminal 30. A voltage supply for the pressure control modules and a voltage of 5 volts for the
sensors are forwarded. The module also supplies a stabilised voltage of 5 volts for internal control unit
operation.
Input circuits
The input circuits are for conditioning the signals for the microcontroller (µC) input.
Superimposed spurious signals on the inputs are filtered. Information is transmitted in both directions at the
diagnosis interface, i.e. to the control unit and from the control unit, e.g. to the diagnosis unit (MAN-cats).
Computer
The computer (in the control unit) contains two redundant microcontrollers (µC) with EEPROM and two
CAN controllers (general CAN, brake CAN). The microcontrollers evaluate the signals conditioned by the
input circuits and control the output via CAN databus.
Pressure control module supply

In the case of pressure control module supply, each pressure control module is activated successively by
the microcontrollers (µC) and given a CAN address after the EBS control unit is activated.
The pressure control modules can be deactivated individually, e.g. when system faults are detected.
CAN interfaces
− General CAN: (T-CAN) Data exchange with other control units.
− Brake CAN: Data exchange between EBS control unit and pressure control modules in the vehicle.
Output stages
The output stages activate components such as sustained-action brake shut-off, brake wear indicator and
the yellow ABS check. The red warning light is activated by a self-conducting output stage.
Connector pin assignment - as seen looking at the control unit
Connector drop-out detection

An integral switch in the wiring harness connector (pin X1/15) switches on the red warning lamp by closing
contacts X1/12 and X1/18 on the wiring harness side as soon as the wiring harness is not
connected or drops out due to loose contact.
The switch is opened again as soon as the wiring harness is connected to the control unit.
Note: (wiring diagram, section 6)
T 61-A1 3.01 - 3
Connector pin assignment
Connector X1
Pin Line no. Designation

1 Blue/white CAN_L (SAE J1939)
3 Blue/red CAN_H (SAE J1939)
6 74512 Button, ASR spin threshold increase
7 73001 Fuse F162-voltage supply, terminal 15
8 73000 Fuse F161-voltage supply, terminal 30
9 68100 Check lamp, brake wear
10 31000/31007 Ground, control unit
11 74100 Check lamp, ASR info.
12 31000/31007 Ground, pressure control modules (input)
13 16202/73201 Diagnosis, K-line
14 73200 Diagnosis, L-line
15 --- Detection, interrupt (connector drop-out detection)
16 73504 Activation line to sustained-action brake relay
17 73100 Check lamp, ABS, yellow
18 73104 Check lamp, ABS, red
Connector X2

1 73599 Indicator, frequent-stop brake applied
2 73500 5V voltage supply, brake power sensor
3 73501 Ground, brake power sensor (analogue)
4 73503 Pressure setpoint 2 from brake power sensor
5 68302 Switch input, frequent-stop brake
7 73502 Pressure setpoint 1 from brake power sensor
Connector X3

2 CAN 112 Ground, pressure control module, 1-channel, left
3 CAN 122 Ground, pressure control module, 1-channel, right
5 CAN 114 CAN_L for pressure control module, 1-channel, left
6 CAN 124 CAN_L for pressure control module, 1-channel, right
8 CAN 113 CAN_H for pressure control module, 1-channel, left
9 CAN 123 CAN_H for pressure control module, 1-channel, right
11 CAN 111 Voltage supply for pressure control module, left
12 CAN 121 Voltage supply for pressure control module, right
Connector X4

4 CAN 132/142 Ground, pressure control module, 2-channel
7 CAN 134/144 CAN_L for pressure control module, 2-channel
6 CAN 132 Ground, pressure control module, 2-channel
9 CAN 134 CAN_L for pressure control module, 2-channel
10 CAN 133/143 CAN_H for pressure control module, 2-channel
12 CAN 133 CAN_H for pressure control module, 2-channel
13 CAN 131/141 Voltage supply for pressure control module, 2-channel
15 CAN 131 Voltage supply for pressure control module, 2-channel
3.01 - 4 T 61-A1
Service brake valve with integrated brake power sensor
The brake power sensor is electrically connected to the EBS control unit. The two potentiometer sensor
signals – pressure setpoint 1 and pressure setpoint 2 – run in opposite directions.
The EBS control unit uses pressure setpoint 1 and pressure setpoint 2 to determine setpoints for the
pressure control modules.
The electrical and pneumatic circuits are harmonised in the vehicle by means of EOL programming.
Service brake valve (A) Brake power sensor (B)

3 Breather 1 Ground 3 Pressure setpoint 1
11 Energy inflow, circuit 1 2 Pressure setpoint 2 4 5V voltage supply
12 Energy inflow, circuit 2
21 Energy outflow, brake circuit 1
22 Energy outflow, brake circuit 2
Brake power sensor signals

The incoming brake power sensor signals are conditioned and checked. The pressure setpoints 1 and 2
and the service brake valve pressure curve stored in the EEPROM (electrically erasable programmable
read-only memory) give a setpoint. This is corrected based on EOL specifications and sent to the "brake"
CAN databus.
Note
During EOL programming, harmonisation can be performed automatically by braking with the back-up
circuit or entering the EOL parameters manually.
Note that the brake power sensor voltage is balanced with the brake pressure at the pressure control
module output. Reduction valves in the pneumatic back-up circuit influence the result.
Monitoring
The sum of the negative field voltages (pressure setpoint 1, pressure setpoint 2) is monitored in the EBS
control unit. A signal line short-circuit is also detected during braking, due to uneven protective
resistances.
T 61-A1 3.01 - 5
Pressure control module (1-channel), right and left of front axle
A ABS sensor, front axle, right (B120) C CAN databus and voltage
B Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right (B332) or supply
sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left (B333) 1 Ground
1 Ground 2 24V voltage supply
2 Not used 3 CAN HIGH
3 Signal from sensor 4 CAN LOW
4 5V voltage supply D ABS sensor, front axle, left (B119)
1 Energy inflow (supply) 3 Breather

2 Energy outflow (brake cylinder) 4 Back-up circuit
During each braking operation, the pressure control module energises the brake wear sensor and the
sensor signal is measured in the pressure control module.
The signals the pressure control module receives from the speed sensor and brake wear sensor are
forwarded to the EBS control unit via the "brake" CAN databus.
If no EBS function is active, the pressure sensor measured value 5 is adjusted in line with the current
brake cylinder pressure using a time constant (automatic atmospheric pressure setting). The range is
limited and may last approx. 1 second when the ignition is switched "ON" after the service brake has been
released. This adjustment time must be taken into account in measurements.
The pressure control module executes open or closed-loop control functions in three different states:
− Normal functioning:
Pressure control module control unit energised and electrical setpoint available or ASR brake
regulation required.
When the EBS function is requested, the pressure control module commences brake pressure
regulation by closing the back-up circuit solenoid valve (back-up valve) 1 and activating the intake
valve 2 and exhaust valve 3 accordingly.
− Braking with the back-up circuit:
Pressure control module control unit energised but no electrical setpoint or actual value available.
If the electrical setpoint or actual value is defective, the system switches the pressure control module
to the back-up circuit (back-up valve is not switched and is open). The pneumatic pressure controls
the pressure to the brake cylinders via the relay valve 4 . The speed sensor signals are processed in
the pressure control module and communication between the pressure control module and EBS
control unit is maintained.
− Pressure control module de-energised:
The solenoid valves are de-energised. The pneumatic pressure service brake valve controls the
pressure to the brake cylinders via the relay valve whilst braking is through the back-up circuit.
3.01 - 6 T 61-A1
Pressure control module (2-channel) on the 2nd axle and on the 3rd axle
A ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121) or

ABS Sensor, 3rd axle, left (B223) E Not used
B Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) F Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334)
Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388)
1 Ground 1 Ground
2 Signal from sensor (B389) 2 Signal from sensor (B388)
3 Signal from sensor (B335) 3 Signal from sensor (B334)
4 5V voltage supply 4 5V voltage supply
C ALB sensor, rear axle (B336) G CAN databus and voltage supply
ALB sensor, 2nd axle (B503), 3rd axle (B504) 1 Ground
1 Ground 2 24V voltage supply
2 Not used 3 CAN HIGH
3 Signal from sensor 4 CAN LOW
4 5V voltage supply
D Not used H ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122) or
ABS Sensor, 3rd axle, right (B224)
1 Energy inflow (supply) 3 Breather

21/22 Energy outflow (brake cylinder) 4 Back-up circuit
The pressure control module energises the brake wear sensor and the sensor signal is measured in the
The signals the pressure control module receives from the speed sensor, brake wear sensor and ALB
sensor are forwarded to the EBS control unit via the "brake" CAN databus.
If no EBS function is active, the pressure sensor measured value 5 is adjusted in line with the current
brake cylinder pressure using a time constant (automatic atmospheric pressure setting). Adjustment is
limited and may last up to 1 second after the ignition is switched "ON" or the service brake is released.
This adjustment time must be taken into account in measurements.
The pressure control module executes open or closed-loop control functions in three different states:
− Normal functioning:
Pressure control module control unit energised and electrical setpoint available or ASR brake
regulation required.
When the EBS function is requested, the pressure control module commences brake pressure
regulation by closing the back-up circuit solenoid valve (back-up valve) 3 and activating the intake
valve 2 and exhaust valve 1 accordingly.
T 61-A1 3.01 - 7
− Braking with the back-up circuit:

Pressure control module control unit energised but no electrical setpoint or actual value available.
If the electrical setpoint or actual value is defective, the system switches the pressure control module
to the back-up circuit (back-up valve is not switched). The pneumatic pressure controls the pressure
to the brake cylinders via the relay valve 4 . There is no automatic load-dependent braking or wear
regulation. The speed sensor signals in the pressure control module are processed and
communication between the pressure control module and EBS control unit is maintained.
− Pressure control module de-energised:
The solenoid valves are de-energised. The pneumatic pressure service brake valve controls the
pressure to the brake cylinders via the relay valve whilst braking is through the back-up circuit.
Automatic load-dependent brake power control, ALB sensor
Pin Designation
1 5V voltage supply
2 Ground
3 Signal from sensor
A pressure sensor is used to determine the load on vehicles that have air suspension on the rear axle. This
pressure sensor is supplied with a voltage of 5V by the 2-channel pressure control module. The various
pressures are converted into electrical voltage signals in the pressure sensor (analogue/digital converter).
These signal values are assigned brake pressure curves which the EBS control unit uses to control the
brake pressures.
Brake pad wear sensor
Sensors with spring pins are used as brake pad wear sensors on disc brakes.
The brake pad wear sensor is only energised during braking. The brake pad wear sensor then sends a
wear or adjustment-dependent voltage to the pressure control module.
At the end of electric braking, the brake pad wear sensor voltage is measured. This value is sent to the
EBS control unit via the "brake" CAN databus for evaluation. Depending on the measuring principle
applied, the value can be influenced by the brake disc wear.
3.01 - 8 T 61-A1
− The EBS control unit can not distinguish between pad wear and disc wear.
If the brake pad thickness falls below the minimum allowed, the EBS control unit activates the brake
system check and the "Brake pad wear" error message appears on the display.
− Brake pad wear control
The brake pad wear control system calculates corrective brake pressure values for each axle based on
a requirement to keep the sum of brake pressures constant in order to ensure harmonisation of brake
pad wear and an increase in brake pad lifetime. There is no wheel-by-wheel regulation.
Speed sensor
The speed sensing system consists of a rotor and an inductive speed sensor. The rotor is mounted in
accordance with the familiar ABS requirements.
When the wheel rotates, an alternating voltage is created in the speed sensor, the frequency of which is
proportional to the wheel speed.
The speed sensor is electrically connected to the pressure control module.
The assignment of speed sensors to wheels in the case of connection at the pressure control module
can be EOL-programmed.
− Monitoring
The speed sensor is monitored by the pressure control module.

The time that elapses before the software detects a short-circuit between speed sensor connections
depends on the vehicle speed.
− Vehicle speed calculation
The speed sensor signals are pre-processed in the pressure control module to ensure that a vehicle
speed signal promptly arrives at the EBS control unit via the "brake" CAN databus. The vehicle speed is
determined from the data received from all the sensed wheels and the sent pressure control module
status signals, taking into account different tyre diameters and the slip criteria. This information is then
sent to the "brake" CAN databus.
T 61-A1 3.01 - 9
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
EBS control unit (device no. A402)
Design
A402
The housing contains a printed circuit board with a multipoint connector. The control unit electronic system
is configured with integrated circuits, microcontrollers and other electronic components.
Installation position (for A25, A26 and A30 buses and coaches)
A402
The control unit is located on the main switchboard. The main switchboard is located behind a roof hatch in
the roof transverse duct between the driver's partition and the first row of seats on the right.
Opening the roof hatch

Important! – Danger of injury!
When unlocking the roof hatch quick-release locks, always use one hand to stop the hatch from
falling.
T 61-A1 4.01 - 1
Installation position (for R02 bus/coach)
A402
The control unit is located in the control unit plug-in module, at the front left in the main switchboard area.
4.01 - 2 T 61-A1
Service brake valve with integrated brake power sensor (device no. G7.303 or G7.304/B337)
Design
B337
G7.303
or
G7.304
The dual-circuit pneumatic service brake valve (G7.303 or G7.304) has an integrated electrical brake power
sensor (B337). The brake power sensor is used for generating electrical/pneumatic signals for admitting
and removing air in the electronically controlled brake system. A plunger is used for actuation in each case.
The plunger actuates the brake power sensor and, by means of the usual springs, a reaction piston and
valve assembly for applying the pneumatic pressure. A single electrical circuit supplies the voltage for the
brake power sensor (constant 5V from the EBS control unit). Two potentiometer sensors are actuated at
the same time.
Installation position (e.g. for A25, A26 and A30 buses and coaches)
B337
G7.303
The service brake valve with integrated brake power sensor is located below the brake pedal (pedals).
T 61-A1 4.02 - 1
Pressure control module (1-channel) (device no. G67.302/Y262 right and G67.302/Y263 left)
Design
Y262/Y263
G67.302
The pressure control module on the front axle is a 1-channel electro-pneumatic component comprising
relay valve, filter, silencer, solenoid valves for back-up circuit (back-up valve), inlet valve/outlet valve,
pressure sensor, electronic control as well as pneumatic and electrical connections.
At the same time, it is the node for transmitting the signals of the connected sensors, such as
speed sensor
brake pad wear sensor
to the EBS control unit via the "brake" CAN databus.
G67.302
The pressure control module is fitted on the right and left of the front axle, with the silencer pointing
downwards.
T 61-A1 4.03 - 1
Pressure control module (2-channel) (device no. G67.303/Y264 or Y353/Y354)
Design
Y264
or
Y353/
Y354
G67.303
The pressure control module on the centre axle/rear axle is a 2-channel electro-pneumatic component
comprising relay valve, filter, silencer, solenoid valves for back-up circuit (back-up valve), inlet valve/outlet
valve, pressure sensor, electronic control as well as pneumatic and electrical connections.
For A23 and A24 buses and coaches with centre axle and rear axle:
Pressure control module 2nd axle (Y353) and pressure control module 3rd axle (Y354)
For other buses and coaches with rear axle:
Pressure control module rear axle (Y264)
At the same time, it is the node for transmitting the signals of the connected sensors, such as
speed sensor
brake pad wear sensors
ALB sensor, rear axle
to the EBS control unit via the "brake" CAN databus.
Y264
G67.303
The 2-channel pressure control module is fitted on the rear axle, with the silencer pointing downwards.
T 61-A1 4.04 - 1
ALB sensor, rear axle/centre axle and rear axle (device no. B336 or B503/B504)
Design
B336
or
B503/
B504
The ALB sensor is electrically connected to the pressure control module on the centre axle or on the rear
axle.
For buses and coaches with rear axle - ALB sensor rear axle (B336)
For buses and coaches with centre axle and rear axle - ALB sensor 2nd axle (B503) and ALB sensor 3rd
axle (B504)
A pressure sensor that measures the bellows pressure is used to determine the load in the case of vehicles
with air suspension on the rear axle. It contains a pressure-sensitive measuring element and a booster
circuit.
The pneumatic port is connected to a compressed air line which leads to the air bellows. The air
suspension pressure is sensed by the pressure sensor. This information is analysed together with the
specific vehicle parameters to calculate the current load status.
B336
The ALB sensor is located on the rear axle.
T 61-A1 4.05 - 1
Brake pad wear sensor (device no. B332/B333/B334/B335/B388/B389)
Design
The brake pad wear sensors are electrically connected to the pressure control module.
Data are transferred via the "brake" CAN databus.
The permanently measuring brake pad wear sensor is part of the wheel brake.
In the case of buses and coaches:

− Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right (B332)/front axle
− Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left (B333)/front axle
− Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334)/centre axle or rear axle (in the case of 2-axle vehicles)
− Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335)/centre axle or rear axle (in the case of 2-axle vehicles)
− Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388)/rear axle (in the case of 3-axle vehicles)
− Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389)/rear axle (in the case of 3-axle vehicles)
Each axle has 2 sensors for the brake pads, one on the left side of the axle and one on the right side of the
axle.
T 61-A1 4.06 - 1
Speed sensor (device no. B119/B120/B121/B122/B223/B224)
Design
The speed sensor consists of a coil and a permanent magnet that are firmly bedded in a high-grade steel
jacket to protect against vibrations.
The speed sensor is electrically connected to the pressure control module.
One speed sensor is connected to each of the 1-channel pressure control modules (on the right and left of
the front axle) and two speed sensors are connected to the 2-channel pressure control module (centre
axle/rear axle).
In the case of buses and coaches:

− ABS sensor, 1st axle, left (B119)/front axle
− ABS sensor, 1st axle, right (B120)/front axle
− ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121)/centre axle or rear axle (in the case of 2 and 3-axle vehicles)
− ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122)/centre axle or rear axle (in the case of 2 and 3-axle vehicles)
− ABS sensor, 3rd axle, left (B223)/rear axle (in the case of 3-axle vehicles with centre axle)
− ABS sensor, 3rd axle, right (B224)/rear axle (in the case of 3-axle vehicles with centre axle)
Installation position (e.g. for A25, A26 and A30 buses and coaches-front axle right)
There is a speed sensor on each wheel.
T 61-A1 4.07 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Table of contents
Diagram title Diagram no. Section/page
Guide to using the wiring diagrams 6.01 - 1

Overview, EBS A25/A26/A30 multiplex 6.05 - 2
Overview, EBS A25/A26/A30/A34 multiplex - NES* 6.06 - 2
Overview, EBS A03/A13/A33 6.07 - 2
Overview, EBS A01 6.08 - 2
Overview, EBS A04/A32 6.09 - 2
Overview, EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486 multiplex 6.10 - 2
Overview, EBS A23/A24/489 multiplex - NES* 6.11 - 2
Overview, EBS R02/R03 multiplex 6.12 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A25/A26/A30 multiplex 81.99289.5613 6.20 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A25/A26/A30/A34 multiplex - NES* 88.99289.4657 6.21 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A03/A13/A33 81.99289.5597 6.22 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A01 81.99289.5706 6.23 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A01 88.99289.5622 6.24 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A04/A32 81.99289.5745 6.25 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486 multiplex 88.99289.5043 6.26 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS A23/A24/489 multiplex - NES* 88.99289.5263 6.27 - 2
Wiring diagram, EBS R02/R03 multiplex 81.99289.5807 6.28 - 2
* NES: New Electronic Structure
T 61-A1 6.00 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Guide to using the wiring diagrams
1 Component designation (here: Diode V100, central electrical system, number 53)
2 Installation position at the front end of the central electrical system (here: Stamped number 53)
3 Plug connection at the rear end of the central electrical system (here: Plug 78, connection 8)
4 Line number; repeatedly printed along the length of the wire (cross-section is only printed if larger
than 12)
5 Sheet number (not page number) and current path number
Indication of sheet number and current path on which the line continues
(here: Line 31002 continues on sheet 2 and current path 4)
6 Plug connection (here: 1-pole plug connection X104 in CES area)
7 Component installation position (here: 21-pole plug connection X238 pin R
-cab to engine cable line - in mid-section)
8 Current path number (Important: Each sheet is again numbered from 1 to 55)
Important note regarding use of the diagram keys: Some of the item numbers are followed by a three-
digit number in brackets. This three-digit number is the component code number!
These code numbers appear on the list of equipment in Repair Manual T60.
T 61-A1 6.01 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Installation positions, A25/A26/A30
Location identifiers Installation position
A .............................................................................................................. Rear of vehicle

B .............................................................................................................. Engine, gearbox
C .............................................................................................................. Front of vehicle
D .............................................................................................................. Main switchboard
E .............................................................................................................. Equipment compartment (battery box)
E2 .............................................................................................................. Equipment board 2 (transverse duct)
E3 .............................................................................................................. Equipm. board 3 (cen. computer/g'box)
E4 .............................................................................................................. Equipment board 4 (EDC/CNG)
F .............................................................................................................. Instrument panel
FH .............................................................................................................. Control panel
G .............................................................................................................. Battery box
H .............................................................................................................. Left-hand side of vehicle
J .............................................................................................................. Right-hand side of vehicle
K .............................................................................................................. Middle of vehicle
L .............................................................................................................. Ceiling
N .............................................................................................................. Front axle
P .............................................................................................................. Driven axle/trailing axle
6.01 - 2 T 61-A1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Installation positions, A01
A .............................................................................................................. Rear of vehicle

B .............................................................................................................. Engine, gearbox
E1 .............................................................................................................. Equipment board 1 (sec. switchboard)
E2 .............................................................................................................. Equipment board 2
G .............................................................................................................. Battery box
L .............................................................................................................. Ceiling
N .............................................................................................................. Front axle
P .............................................................................................................. Rear axle
T 61-A1 6.01 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Installation positions, A03/A33
A .............................................................................................................. Rear of vehicle

B .............................................................................................................. Engine, gearbox
G .............................................................................................................. Battery box
L .............................................................................................................. Ceiling
M .............................................................................................................. Toilet
N .............................................................................................................. Front axle
P .............................................................................................................. Rear axle
6.01 - 4 T 61-A1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
A .............................................................................................................. Rear of vehicle

B .............................................................................................................. Engine, gearbox
G .............................................................................................................. Battery box
L .............................................................................................................. Ceiling
N .............................................................................................................. Front axle
P .............................................................................................................. Rear axle
T 61-A1 6.01 - 5
WIRING DIAGRAMS
A .............................................................................................................. Rear of vehicle

B .............................................................................................................. Engine, gearbox
G .............................................................................................................. Battery box
L .............................................................................................................. Ceiling
M .............................................................................................................. Toilet
N .............................................................................................................. Front axle
P .............................................................................................................. Rear axle
R .............................................................................................................. Pneumatic system
6.01 - 6 T 61-A1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
A .............................................................................................................. Rear of vehicle

B .............................................................................................................. Engine, gearbox
E3 .............................................................................................................. Equipment board 3 (driver's partition)
FH .............................................................................................................. Control panel, side
G .............................................................................................................. Battery box
L .............................................................................................................. Ceiling
N .............................................................................................................. Front axle
P .............................................................................................................. Driven axle
T 61-A1 6.01 - 7
WIRING DIAGRAMS
A .............................................................................................................. Rear of vehicle

B .............................................................................................................. Engine, gearbox
E3 .............................................................................................................. Equipment board 3 (central computer)
FH .............................................................................................................. Control panel
G .............................................................................................................. Battery box
L .............................................................................................................. Ceiling
N .............................................................................................................. Front axle
P .............................................................................................................. Rear axle
6.01 - 8 T 61-A1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
A .............................................................................................................. Rear of vehicle

B .............................................................................................................. Engine, gearbox
E3 .............................................................................................................. Equipm. board 3 (cen. computer/g'box)
FH .............................................................................................................. Control panel
G .............................................................................................................. Battery box
H1 .............................................................................................................. Left-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
J1 .............................................................................................................. Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
^K1 .............................................................................................................. Middle of vehicle (rear carriage)
L .............................................................................................................. Ceiling
L1 .............................................................................................................. Ceiling (rear carriage)
N .............................................................................................................. Front axle (1st axle)
O .............................................................................................................. Centre axle (2nd axle)
P .............................................................................................................. Rear axle (3rd axle)
T 61-A1 6.01 - 9
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Installation positions, R02
A .............................................................................................................. Rear of vehicle

B .............................................................................................................. Engine, gearbox
E6 .............................................................................................................. Area of central electrical system (CES)
E7 .............................................................................................................. Control unit plug-in modules
G .............................................................................................................. Battery box (front)
G1 .............................................................................................................. Battery box (rear)
L .............................................................................................................. Ceiling
N .............................................................................................................. Front axle
P .............................................................................................................. Rear axle
6.01 - 10 T 61-A1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.05 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A25/A26/A30 multiplex
Key
Modification status: 06.99
A300 Node, instrument panel X1265 Plug connection, control panel

A402 Control unit, EBS X1768 Plug connection, main switchboard-EBS, steered trailing axle
A413 Multiplex node, front, control units 1.3 X1791 Connector, CAN databus, EBS
A415 Multiplex node, ceiling, front 1.5 X1792 Plug connection, assembly, EBS, driver's partition
A423 Multiplex node, vehicle middle 2.3 X1887 V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, left
B119 ABS sensor, front axle, left X1888 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, left
B120 ABS sensor, front axle, right X1889 V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
B121 ABS sensor, rear axle, left X1890 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
B122 ABS sensor, rear axle, right X1931 Bridge, frequent-stop brake, emergency release
B332 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right X2008 Plug connection, assembly, EBS
B333 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left Y262 Pressure control module, front axle, right
B334 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right Y263 Pressure control module, front axle, left
B335 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left Y264 Pressure control module, rear axle
B336 ALB sensor, rear axle
B337 Brake power sensor, EBS
B388 Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right
B389 Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left blrt Blue red (drive train CAN databus, High)
F161 Fuse, EBS/ABS, voltage supply, blws Blue white (drive train CAN databus, Low)
pressure control valve ws Ground, white
F162 Fuse, EBS/ABS, control rt Signal, red
H139 Check lamp, ABS, tractor ge Supply, yellow
R205 Load resistor, EBS br Brown
S281 Button, ASR shut-off sw Black
X134 Plug connection, main switchboard-ceiling
X200 Plug connection, 37-pole, diagnosis (MAN-cats)
X202 Plug connection, diagnosis (flashing code)
X618 Distributor, terminal board X102, line 31000
X778 Plug connection, main switchboard-vehicle middle
X865 Plug connection, main switchboard-central computer I Connector drop-out detection
X867 Plug connection, main switchboard-central computer Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
X869 Plug connection, main switchboard-central computer Pin X1/12 and pin X1/18 short-circuit if not inserted.
X893 Plug connection, main switchboard-control panel
X988 Plug connection, main switchboard-ABS, assembly II Series standard wiring diagram
III Additional wiring diagram, gearbox
T 61-A1 6.05 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A25/A26/A30 multiplex
T 61-A1 6.05 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.06 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A25/A26/A30/A34 multiplex - NES
Key
A300 Node, instrument panel X1768 Plug connection, main switchboard-EBS, steered trailing axle
A402 Control unit, EBS X1791 Connector, CAN databus, EBS
A413 Multiplex node, front, control units 1.3 X1792 Plug connection, assembly, EBS, driver's partition
A415 Multiplex node, ceiling, front 1.5 X1887 V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, left
A423 Multiplex node, vehicle middle 2.3 X1888 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, left
B119 ABS sensor, front axle, left X1889 V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
B120 ABS sensor, front axle, right X1890 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
B121 ABS sensor, rear axle, left X1931 Bridge, frequent-stop brake, emergency release
B122 ABS sensor, rear axle, right X2008 Plug connection, assembly, EBS
B332 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right X2138 Plug connection, main switch panel-circuit board
B333 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left X2153 Interface connector, driver's partition
B334 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right Y262 Pressure control module, front axle, right
B335 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left Y263 Pressure control module, front axle, left
B336 ALB sensor, rear axle Y264 Pressure control module, rear axle
B388 Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right
B389 Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left blrt Blue red (drive train CAN databus, High)
F161 Fuse, EBS/ABS, voltage supply, blws Blue white (drive train CAN databus, Low)
pressure control valve ws Ground, white
F162 Fuse, EBS/ABS, control rt Signal, red
H139 Check lamp, ABS, tractor ge Supply, yellow
R205 Load resistor, EBS br Brown
S281 Button, ASR shut-off sw Black
X202 Plug connection, diagnosis (flashing code) I Connector drop-out detection
X618 Distributor, terminal board X102, line 31000 Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
X778 Plug connection, main switchboard-vehicle middle Pin X1/12 and pin X1/18 short-circuit if not inserted.
X865 Plug connection, main switchboard-central computer
X867 Plug connection, main switchboard-central computer II Series standard wiring diagram
X893 Plug connection, main switchboard-control panel III Additional wiring diagram, gearbox
X988 Plug connection, main switchboard-ABS, assembly
X1265 Plug connection, control panel IV Additional wiring diagram, ECAS
T 61-A1 6.06 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A25/A26/A30/A34 multiplex - NES
T 61-A1 6.06 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.07 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A03/A13/A33
Key
Modification status: 12.98/11.99
A185 Panel of check lamps blrt Blue red (drive train CAN databus, High)
A402 Control unit, EBS blws Blue white (drive train CAN databus, Low)
B119 ABS sensor, front axle, left
B120 ABS sensor, front axle, right
B121 ABS sensor, rear axle, left I Connector drop-out detection
B122 ABS sensor, rear axle, right Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
B332 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right Pin X1/12 and pin X1/18 short-circuit if not inserted.
B333 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left
B334 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right II Series standard wiring diagram
B335 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left
B337 Brake power sensor, EBS III Additional wiring diagram, retarder
F161 Fuse, EBS/ABS, voltage supply,
pressure control valve IV Additional wiring diagram, EDC
F162 Fuse, EBS/ABS, control
H139 Check lamp, ABS, tractor V Ground
H140 Check lamp, ASR info.
H373 Check lamp, brake pad wear VI Signal
R155 Terminator, CAN databus
RES8 See note on wiring diagram VII Supply
X107 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 1
X191 Plug connection, ABS(EBS)-harness-equipment board 2
X192 Earth connector, ABS(EBS)-harness
X1361 Clamp connection, CAN terminator
Y262 Pressure control module, front axle, right
Y263 Pressure control module, front axle, left
Y264 Pressure control module, rear axle
T 61-A1 6.07 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A03/A13/A33
T 61-A1 6.07 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.08 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A01
Key
A185 Panel of check lamps blrt Blue red (drive train CAN databus, High)
A402 Control unit, EBS blws Blue white (drive train CAN databus, Low)
B119 ABS sensor, front axle, left
B121 ABS sensor, rear axle, left I Connector drop-out detection
B122 ABS sensor, rear axle, right Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
B332 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right Pin X1/12 and pin X1/18 short-circuit if not inserted.
B334 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right II Series standard wiring diagram
B335 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left
B337 Brake power sensor, EBS III Additional wiring diagram, retarder
F161 Fuse, EBS/ABS, voltage supply,
pressure control valve IV Additional wiring diagram, EDC
H139 Check lamp, ABS, tractor V Ground
H373 Check lamp, brake pad wear VI Signal
R155 Terminator, CAN databus (omitted in the case of
wiring diagram no. 88.99289.5622) VII Supply
S281 Button, ASR shut-off
X107 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 1 VIII Additional wiring diagram, central locking
X191 Plug connection, ABS(EBS)-harness-equipment board 2 IX Additional wiring diagram, differential lock
T 61-A1 6.08 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A01
T 61-A1 6.08 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.09 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A04/A32
Key
X1887 V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, left
A185 Panel of check lamps X1888 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, left
A402 Control unit, EBS X1889 V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
B119 ABS sensor, front axle, left X1890 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
B121 ABS sensor, rear axle, left blrt Blue red (drive train CAN databus, High)
B122 ABS sensor, rear axle, right blws Blue white (drive train CAN databus, Low)
B332 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right
B334 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right I Connector drop-out detection
B335 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
B336 ALB sensor, rear axle Pin X1/12 and pin X1/18 short-circuit if not inserted.
B388 Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right II Series standard wiring diagram
B389 Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left
F161 Fuse, EBS/ABS, voltage supply, III Additional wiring diagram, retarder
pressure control valve
F162 Fuse, EBS/ABS, control IV Additional wiring diagram, EDC
H139 Check lamp, ABS, tractor
H140 Check lamp, ASR info. V Ground
H373 Check lamp, brake pad wear
R155 Terminator, CAN databus VI Signal
S281 Button, ASR shut-off
X107 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 1 VII Supply
X191 Plug connection, ABS(EBS)-harness-equipment board 2 VIII Additional wiring diagram, central locking
X200 Plug connection, 37-pole, diagnosis (MAN-cats) IX Additional wiring diagram, differential lock
T 61-A1 6.09 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A04/A32
T 61-A1 6.09 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.10 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486 multiplex
Key
A300 Node, instrument panel X1265 Plug connection, control panel

A402 Control unit, EBS X1768 Plug connection, main switchboard-EBS, steered trailing axle
A413 Multiplex node, front, control units 1.3 X1791 Connector, CAN databus, EBS
A415 Multiplex node, ceiling, front 1.5 X1792 Plug connection, assembly, EBS, driver's partition
A423 Multiplex node, vehicle middle 2.3 X1887 V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, left
B119 ABS sensor, front axle, left X1888 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, left
B120 ABS sensor, front axle, right X1889 V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
B121 ABS sensor, rear axle, left X1890 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
B122 ABS sensor, rear axle, right X1931 Bridge, frequent-stop brake, emergency release
B332 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right X2008 Plug connection, assembly, EBS
B333 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left Y262 Pressure control module, front axle, right
B334 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right Y263 Pressure control module, front axle, left
B335 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left Y264 Pressure control module, rear axle
F161 Fuse, EBS/ABS, voltage supply, blrt Blue red (drive train CAN databus, High)
pressure control valve blws Blue white (drive train CAN databus, Low)
H139 Check lamp, ABS, tractor I Connector drop-out detection
R205 Load resistor, EBS Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
S281 Button, ASR shut-off Pin X1/12 and pin X1/18 short-circuit if not inserted.
X200 Plug connection, 37-pole, diagnosis (MAN-cats) II Series standard wiring diagram
X618 Distributor, terminal board X102, line 31000 III Additional wiring diagram, gearbox
X865 Plug connection, main switchboard-central computer IV Additional wiring diagram, ECAS
X869 Plug connection, main switchboard-central computer V Ground
X988 Plug connection, main switchboard-ABS, assembly VI Signal
VII Supply
T 61-A1 6.10 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486 multiplex
T 61-A1 6.10 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.11 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A23/A24/489 multiplex - NES
Key
Modification status: 07.00 X869 Plug connection, main switchboard-central computer
A300 Node, instrument panel X988 Plug connection, main switchboard-ABS, assembly
A402 Control unit, EBS X1265 Plug connection, control panel
A413 Multiplex node, front, control units 1.3 X1768 Plug connection, main switchboard-EBS, steered trailing axle
A415 Multiplex node, ceiling, front 1.5 X1791 Connector, CAN databus, EBS
A423 Multiplex node, vehicle middle 2.3 X1792 Plug connection, assembly, EBS, driver's partition
B119 ABS sensor, front axle, left X1887 V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, left
B120 ABS sensor, front axle, right X1888 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, left
B121 ABS sensor, rear axle, left X1889 V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
B122 ABS sensor, rear axle, right X1890 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
B223 ABS sensor, 3rd axle, left X1931 Bridge, frequent-stop brake, emergency release
B224 ABS sensor, 3rd axle, right X2008 Plug connection, assembly, EBS
B332 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right Y262 Pressure control module, front axle, right
B333 Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left Y263 Pressure control module, front axle, left
B334 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right Y353 Pressure control module, 2nd axle
B335 Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left Y354 Pressure control module, 3rd axle
B388 Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right blrt Blue red (drive train CAN databus, High)
B389 Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left blws Blue white (drive train CAN databus, Low)
B503 ALB sensor, 2nd axle
B504 ALB sensor, 3rd axle I Connector drop-out detection
F161 Fuse, EBS/ABS, voltage supply, Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
pressure control valve Pin X1/12 and pin X1/18 short-circuit if not inserted.
H139 Check lamp, ABS, tractor II Series standard wiring diagram
R205 Load resistor, EBS
S281 Button, ASR shut-off III Additional wiring diagram, gearbox
X200 Plug connection, 37-pole, diagnosis (MAN-cats) IV Additional wiring diagram, ECAS
X618 Distributor, terminal board X102, line 31000 V Ground
X865 Plug connection, main switchboard-central computer VI Signal
VII Supply
T 61-A1 6.11 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS A23/A24/489 multiplex - NES
T 61-A1 6.11 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.12 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS R02/R03 multiplex
Key
A143 Control unit, ECAS blrt Blue red (drive train CAN databus, High)
A144 Control unit, retarder blws Blue white (drive train CAN databus, Low)
A302 Central computer 2
A330 Control unit, AS-TRONIC (on gearbox)
A402 Control unit, EBS I Connector drop-out detection
A403 Vehicle management computer Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
A407 Instrumentation Pin X1/12 and pin X1/18 short-circuit if not inserted.
A409 Control unit, ECAM
B119 ABS sensor, front axle, left II Wiring diagram, basic vehicle
B121 ABS sensor, driven axle, left III Additional wiring diagram, ECAS
B122 ABS sensor, driven axle, right
B332 Sensor, brake pad, front axle, right IV Additional wiring diagram, voltage supply
B333 Sensor, brake pad, front axle, left
B334 Sensor, brake pad, driven axle, right V Ground
B335 Sensor, brake pad, driven axle, left
B336 ALB sensor, rear axle VI Signal
F161 Fuse, EBS/ABS, voltage supply, VII Supply
H107 ABS, tractor/trailer
H415 Check lamp, directional stability
X1908 Crimped connector, K-KWP2
T 61-A1 6.12 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Overview, EBS R02/R03 multiplex
T 61-A1 6.12 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.20 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Wiring diagram, EBS A25/A26/A30 multiplex

Codes for installation positions
Key
Diagram no. 81.99289.5613 Sheet 1 of 3 A Rear of vehicle G Battery box
Modification status: 11.98 B Engine, gearbox H Left-hand side of vehicle
A = Voltage supply
C Front of vehicle H1 Left-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
B = Pressure control module, front axle D Main switchboard J Right-hand side of vehicle
C = Pressure control module, 2nd and 3rd axle E Equipment compartment (battery box) J1 Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
E1 Equipment board 1 K Middle of vehicle
A402 (337) Control unit, EBS
E2 Equipment board 2 K1 Middle of vehicle (rear carriage)
B119 (245) ABS sensor, front axle, left E3 Equipment board 3 L Ceiling
B120 (246) ABS sensor, front axle, right E4 Equipment board 4 L1 Ceiling (rear carriage)
B121 (247) ABS sensor, rear axle, left E6 Area of central electrical system (CES) M Toilet
B122 (248) ABS sensor, rear axle, right
B332 (243) Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right E7 Control unit plug-in modules N Front axle (1st axle)
B333 (253) Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
B334 (254) Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
B335 (255) Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left
R Pneumatic system
B336 (256) ALB sensor, rear axle
B388 (305) Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right I Series standard wiring diagram
B389 (306) Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left
F161 (129) Fuse, EBS/ABS, voltage supply,

F162 (117) Fuse, EBS/ABS, control
X864 (128) Distributor, terminal board X874, line 30022

X1747 (128) Distributor, line 15008
X1768 Plug connection, main switchboard-EBS, steered trailing
axle
X1779 Plug connection, front end-EBS, steered trailing axle
X1792 Plug connection, assembly, EBS, driver's partition
Y262 (170) Pressure control module, front axle, right
Y263 (170) Pressure control module, front axle, left
X1888 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, left
Y264 (171) Pressure control module, rear axle
X1889 V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
X1890 Ground crimp, brake pad 2/3, axle, right
T 61-A1 6.20 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Diagram no. 81.99289.5613 Sheet 1 of 3
T 61-A1 6.20 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
A = Chassis earth distribution
B = Brake wear/ASR/EBS check D Main switchboard J Right-hand side of vehicle
C = Load resistor E Equipment compartment (battery box) J1 Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
A413 (280) Multiplex node, front, control units 1.3
A415 (280) Multiplex node, ceiling, front 1.5 E3 Equipment board 3 L Ceiling
A423 (280) Multiplex node, vehicle middle 2.3 E4 Equipment board 4 L1 Ceiling (rear carriage)
E6 Area of central electrical system (CES) M Toilet
H139 (111) Check lamp, ABS, tractor
E7 Control unit plug-in modules N Front axle (1st axle)
R205 (126) Load resistor, EBS F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
X134 Plug connection, main switchboard-ceiling R Pneumatic system
X988 Plug connection, main switchboard-ABS, assembly I Series standard wiring diagram
X2008 Plug connection, assembly, EBS
Note:
*) Connector drop-out detection
Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell 15 when inserted!
Pin 12 and 18 short-circuit if not inserted.
T 61-A1 6.20 - 4
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.20 - 5
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
A = CAN bus
B = ASR shut-off D Main switchboard J Right-hand side of vehicle
C = Diagnosis E Equipment compartment (battery box) J1 Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
D = Brake power sensor E1 Equipment board 1 K Middle of vehicle
E = Frequent-stop brake E2 Equipment board 2 K1 Middle of vehicle (rear carriage)
A300 (223) Node, instrument panel E3 Equipment board 3 L Ceiling
A402 (337) Control unit, EBS E4 Equipment board 4 L1 Ceiling (rear carriage)
A415 (280) Multiplex node, ceiling, front 1.5 E6 Area of central electrical system (CES) M Toilet
A423 (280) Multiplex node, vehicle middle 2.3
B337 (244) Brake power sensor, EBS F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
FH control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
S281 (396) Button, ASR shut-off R Pneumatic system
X134 Plug connection, main switchboard-ceiling I Series standard wiring diagram
X202 Plug connection, diagnosis (flashing code) II Additional wiring diagram, gearbox
X1265 Plug connection, control panel
axle
X1791 Connector, CAN databus, EBS
X1931 Bridge, frequent-stop brake, emergency release
X2023 Plug connection, pedalbox-central connection
T 61-A1 6.20 - 6
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.20 - 7
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.21 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Wiring diagram, EBS A25/A26/A30/A34 multiplex - NES

Key
A = Voltage supply
C = Pressure control module, 2nd and 3rd axle E Equipment compartment (battery box) J1 Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
B121 (247) ABS sensor, rear axle, left E6 Area of central electrical system (CES) M Toilet
B122 (248) ABS sensor, rear axle, right
R Pneumatic system
II Additional wiring diagram, ECAS
X1750 (211) Engine terminal board 1, main switchboard, multiplex


T 61-A1 6.21 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.21 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
X865 Plug connection, main switchboard-central computer I Series standard wiring diagram
X2008 Plug connection, assembly, EBS Note:
X2138 Plug connection, main switchboard-circuit board *) Connector drop-out detection
X2153 Interface connector, driver's partition Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
Pin X1/12 and pin X1/18 short-circuit if not inserted.
T 61-A1 6.21 - 4
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.21 - 5
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
A = CAN bus
X1265 Plug connection, control panel
axle
X2153 Interface connector, driver's partition
T 61-A1 6.21 - 6
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.21 - 7
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.22 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Wiring diagram, EBS A03/A13/A33

Key
A = Voltage supply
C = Pressure control module, rear axle E Equipment compartment (battery box) J1 Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
B119 (245) ABS sensor, 1st axle, left E3 Equipment board 3 L Ceiling
B120 (246) ABS sensor, 1st axle, right E4 Equipment board 4 L1 Ceiling (rear carriage)
B121 (247) ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left E6 Area of central electrical system (CES) M Toilet
B122 (248) ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right
B332 (243) Sensor, brake pad, front axle, right E7 Control unit plug-in modules N Front axle (1st axle)
B333 (253) Sensor, brake pad, front axle, left F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
B334 (254) Sensor, brake pad, rear axle, right FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
B335 (255) Sensor, brake pad, rear axle, left
R Pneumatic system
F161 (103) Fuse, EBS/ABS, voltage supply, I Series standard wiring diagram


T 61-A1 6.22 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.22 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
B = EBS check D Main switchboard J Right-hand side of vehicle
C = Brake wear E Equipment compartment (battery box) J1 Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
D = ASR E1 Equipment board 1 K Middle of vehicle
E = Retarder shut-off E2 Equipment board 2 K1 Middle of vehicle (rear carriage)
F = CAN databus E3 Equipment board 3 L Ceiling
A185 (188) Panel of check lamps E4 Equipment board 4 L1 Ceiling (rear carriage)
A402 (337) Control unit, EBS E6 Area of central electrical system (CES) M Toilet
H139 (105) Check lamp, ABS, tractor F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
H140 (105) Check lamp, ASR info.
H373 (105) Check lamp, brake pad wear FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
R Pneumatic system
R155 (122) Terminator, CAN databus
RES8 See note on wiring diagram I Series standard wiring diagram
X108 Plug connection, main harness-instrument panel II Additional wiring diagram, retarder
X191 Plug connection, ABS(EBS)-harness-equipment board 2 III Additional wiring diagram, EDC
X192 (130) Earth connector, ABS(EBS)-harness
X1001 Plug connection, CAN databus, EDC
X1361 Clamp connection, CAN terminator Note:
Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
T 61-A1 6.22 - 4
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.22 - 5
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
A = Diagnosis
B = Pedal value sensor D Main switchboard J Right-hand side of vehicle
E Equipment compartment (battery box) J1 Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
A402 (337) Control unit, EBS E1 Equipment board 1 K Middle of vehicle
B337 (244) Brake power sensor, EBS
E3 Equipment board 3 L Ceiling
X104 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 1 E4 Equipment board 4 L1 Ceiling (rear carriage)
X107 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 1 E6 Area of central electrical system (CES) M Toilet
X190 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 2 E7 Control unit plug-in modules N Front axle (1st axle)
F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
X202 Plug connection, diagnosis (flashing code) FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
X956 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 2 R Pneumatic system
T 61-A1 6.22 - 6
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.22 - 7
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.23 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Wiring diagram, EBS A01

Key
A = Voltage supply
R Pneumatic system


T 61-A1 6.23 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.23 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
C = ASR E Equipment compartment (battery box) J1 Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
D = Brake wear E1 Equipment board 1 K Middle of vehicle
E = CAN databus E2 Equipment board 2 K1 Middle of vehicle (rear carriage)
F = Retarder shut-off
G = ASR shut-off E3 Equipment board 3 L Ceiling
E4 Equipment board 4 L1 Ceiling (rear carriage)
A185 (188) Panel of check lamps E6 Area of central electrical system (CES) M Toilet
H140 (105) Check lamp, ASR info. FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
H373 (105) Check lamp, brake pad wear R Pneumatic system
R155 (122) Terminator, CAN databus I Series standard wiring diagram
S281 (240) Button, ASR shut-off II Additional wiring diagram, retarder
X105 Plug connection, main harness-main switchboard III Additional wiring diagram, EDC
X191 Plug connection, ABS(EBS)-harness-equipment board 2 IV Additional wiring diagram, central locking
X237 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 2 V Additional wiring diagram, differential lock
X246 Plug connection, main harness-instrument panel
X248 (130) Distributor, line 16000 on instrument panel
X615 (128) Distributor, terminal board X613, line 31000 Note:
X956 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 2 *) Connector drop-out detection
X1001 Plug connection, CAN databus, EDC Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
X1094 Plug connection, main harness-instrument panel Pin X1/12 and pin X1/18 short-circuit if not inserted.
T 61-A1 6.23 - 4
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.23 - 5
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
A = Diagnosis
C = Frequent-stop brake E Equipment compartment (battery box) J1 Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
B337 (244) Brake power sensor, EBS E3 Equipment board 3 L Ceiling
X191 Plug connection, ABS(EBS)-harness-equipment board 2 F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
X200 Plug connection, 37-pole, diagnosis (MAN-cats) FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
X202 Plug connection, diagnosis (flashing code) R Pneumatic system
X774 Plug connection, main switchboard-main harness I Series standard wiring diagram
X2024 Not used
T 61-A1 6.23 - 6
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.23 - 7
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.24 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
A = Voltage supply
R Pneumatic system


T 61-A1 6.24 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.24 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
S281 (240) Button, ASR shut-off I Series standard wiring diagram
X105 Plug connection, main harness-main switchboard II Additional wiring diagram, retarder
X191 Plug connection, ABS(EBS)-harness-equipment board 2 III Additional wiring diagram, central locking
X237 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 2 IV Additional wiring diagram, differential lock
X248 Distributor, line 16000 on instrument panel
X615 Distributor, terminal board X613, line 31000 Note:
X1003 Plug connection, CAN databus, ABS Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
T 61-A1 6.24 - 4
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.24 - 5
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
A = Diagnosis
X200 Plug connection, 37-pole, diagnosis (MAN-cats) F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
X202 Plug connection, diagnosis (flashing code) FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
X237 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 2 R Pneumatic system
X774 Plug connection, main switchboard-main harness
X2022 Plug connection, pedalbox-central connection I Series standard wiring diagram
X2024 Not used
T 61-A1 6.24 - 6
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.24 - 7
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.25 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Wiring diagram, EBS A04/A32

Key
A = Voltage supply
R Pneumatic system
II Additional wiring diagram, retarder

T 61-A1 6.25 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.25 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
R155 (122) Terminator, CAN databus I Series standard wiring diagram
S281 (240) Button, ASR shut-off II Additional wiring diagram, retarder
X105 Plug connection, main harness-main switchboard III Additional wiring diagram, EDC
X191 Plug connection, ABS(EBS)-harness-equipment board 2 IV Additional wiring diagram, central locking
X237 Plug connection, main harness-equipment board 2 V Additional wiring diagram, differential lock
X248 (130) Distributor, line 16000 on instrument panel
X615 (128) Distributor, terminal board X613, line 31000 Note:
X1001 Plug connection, CAN databus, EDC Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
T 61-A1 6.25 - 4
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.25 - 5
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
A = Diagnosis
X191 Plug connection, ABS(EBS)-harness-equipment board 2 F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
X200 Plug connection, 37-pole, diagnosis (MAN-cats) FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
X202 Plug connection, diagnosis (flashing code) R Pneumatic system
X774 Plug connection, main switchboard-main harness I Series standard wiring diagram
X2024 Not used
T 61-A1 6.25 - 6
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.25 - 7
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.26 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Wiring diagram, EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486 multiplex

Key
A = Voltage supply
B121 (247) ABS sensor, driven axle, left E6 Area of central electrical system (CES) M Toilet
B122 (248) ABS sensor, driven axle, right
B332 (243) Sensor, brake pad, front axle, right E7 Control unit plug-in modules N Front axle (1st axle)
B333 (253) Sensor, brake pad, front axle, left F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
B334 (254) Sensor, brake pad, driven axle, right FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
B335 (255) Sensor, brake pad, driven axle, left R Pneumatic system
I Series standard wiring diagram
pressure control valve II Additional wiring diagram, ECAS


T 61-A1 6.26 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.26 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
X865 Plug connection, main switchboard-central computer I Series standard wiring diagram
X2008 Plug connection, assembly, EBS Note:
X2138 Plug connection, main switchboard-circuit board *) Connector drop-out detection
X2153 Interface connector, driver's partition Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
T 61-A1 6.26 - 4
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.26 - 5
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
A = CAN bus
X1265 Plug connection, Control panel
axle
T 61-A1 6.26 - 6
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.26 - 7
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.27 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Wiring diagram, EBS A23/A24/489 multiplex - NES

Key
A = Voltage supply
C = Pressure control module, 2nd axle E Equipment compartment (battery box) J1 Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
B335 (255) Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left R Pneumatic system
B503 (256) ALB sensor, 2nd axle
pressure control valve II Additional wiring diagram, ECAS

axle

Y353 (171) Pressure control module, 2nd axle
T 61-A1 6.27 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.27 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
D = Pressure control module, 3rd axle E1 Equipment board 1 K Middle of vehicle
A413 (280) Multiplex node, front, control units 1.3 E3 Equipment board 3 L Ceiling
A415 (280) Multiplex node, ceiling, front 1.5 E4 Equipment board 4 L1 Ceiling (rear carriage)
A423 (280) Multiplex node, vehicle middle 2.3 E6 Area of central electrical system (CES) M Toilet
B223 (247) ABS sensor, 3rd axle, left
B224 (248) ABS sensor, 3rd axle, right F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
B388 (254) Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
B389 (255) Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left R Pneumatic system
B504 (256) ALB sensor, 3rd axle
R205 (126) Load resistor, EBS Note:

X134 Plug connection, main switchboard-ceiling Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
X618 (128) Distributor, terminal board X102, line 31000 Pin X1/12 and pin X1/18 short-circuit if not inserted.
X1217 Plug connection, front carriage-turntable, left
X1219 Plug connection, turntable-rear carriage, left
X2008 Plug connection, assembly, EBS
X2138 Plug connection, main switchboard-circuit board
Y354 (171) Pressure control module, 3rd axle
T 61-A1 6.27 - 4
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.27 - 5
WIRING DIAGRAMS

Key
A = CAN bus
X127 Plug connection, main switchboard-vehicle middle I Series standard wiring diagram
X200 Plug connection, 37-pole, diagnosis (MAN-cats) II Additional wiring diagram, gearbox
X1265 Plug connection, Control panel
axle
T 61-A1 6.27 - 6
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.27 - 7
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.28 - 1
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Wiring diagram, EBS R02/R03 multiplex

Key
A = Voltage supply, EBS
B = Diagnosis D Main switchboard J Right-hand side of vehicle
C = Check lamps E Equipment compartment (battery box) J1 Right-hand side of v. (rear carriage)
A100 (255) Central electrical system (CES) E2 Equipment board 2 K1 Middle of vehicle (rear carriage)
A402 (399) Control unit, EBS E3 Equipment board 3 L Ceiling
A407 (342) Instrumentation E4 Equipment board 4 L1 Ceiling (rear carriage)
F161 (103) Fuse, EBS/ABS, voltage supply, E7 Control unit plug-in modules N Front axle (1st axle)
F162 (111) Fuse, EBS/ABS, control F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
H107 ABS, tractor/trailer R Pneumatic system
H415 Check lamp, directional stability
I Series standard wiring diagram, basic vehicle
X3096 Plug connection, voltage supply, EBS II Additional wiring diagram, ECAS
III Additional wiring diagram, voltage supply
IV Additional wiring diagram, Intarder EST 48
Note:
Short-circuit spring insulated by control unit cell X1/15 when inserted.
T 61-A1 6.28 - 2
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.28 - 3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
Wiring diagram, EBS R02/R03 multiplex

Key
A = Pressure control module, front axle, left
B = Pressure control module, front axle, right D Main switchboard J Right-hand side of vehicle
A100 Central electrical system E2 Equipment board 2 K1 Middle of vehicle (rear carriage)
A402 (399) Control unit, EBS E3 Equipment board 3 L Ceiling
B119 ABS sensor, front axle, left E6 Area of central electrical system (CES) M Toilet
B120 ABS sensor, front axle, right E7 Control unit plug-in modules N Front axle (1st axle)
B121 ABS sensor, driven axle, left
B122 ABS sensor, driven axle, right F Instrument panel O Centre axle (2nd axle)
B332 Sensor, brake pad, front axle, right FH Control panel P Rear axle (3rd axle)
B333 Sensor, brake pad, front axle, left R Pneumatic system
B334 Sensor, brake pad, driven axle, right
B335 Sensor, brake pad, driven axle, left

T 61-A1 6.28 - 4
WIRING DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 6.28 - 5
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
Table of contents
Function diagram title Function diagram no. Section/page
Function diagram, brake EBS A01 81.99231.0568 7.20 - 2

Function diagram, brake EBS A03/A13/A33 81.99231.0569 7.21 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS A25/A26/A30 81.99231.0571 7.22 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486 81.99231.0576 7.25 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS A23/A24/489 81.99231.0580 7.26 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS R02 81.99231.0578 7.27 - 2
Function diagram, brake EBS R03 81.99231.0579 7.28 - 2
T 61-A1 7.00 - 1
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 7.20-1
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
Function diagram, brake EBS A01
Key
Function diagram no. 81.99231.0568
Device list for brake and compressed air systems G53.67 Filling connection Additions
See device list 81.52100.8197 for device names G53.70 Tyre inflating valve
Modification status: 05.01 G53.73 Test and filling connection 001 Mechanical
G54.10 PA pipe (M12x1.5) emergency release device
G1.1 Compressor, 2-cylinder (in-line), water-cooled G55.200 NC contact (5.8-0.4 bar) 002 Clutch actuator, door
G10.174 Diaphragm cylinder, right-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA) G55.201 NO contact (0.6-0.9 bar) closing system, gearbox
G10.175 Diaphragm cylinder, left-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA) G55.206 NC contact (6.5-0.4 bar) for drain lock gearshift, locking device
G11.302 Combi.cylinder,right-type 24/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G55.208 NC contact (2.0+0.6 bar) for drain lock for trailing axle
G11.303 Combi.cylinder, left-type 24/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G56.2 For exhaust flap 003 Auxiliary consumers
G14.201 Relay valve G57.10 Pressure sensor, 0-10 bar, warn. press. 5, 2.0 ± 0.3
G21.64 Two-way valve G57.300 Pressure sensor 005 Speed sensor
G23.1 Non-return valve G6.2 Without return flow 6.5-0.3 bar
G25.205 Air dryer with pressure regulator 12.5 bar (changeover G6.64 Limited return flow 8.0+0.3 bar 006 Brake pad wear
cartridge with heater) G61.200 NW 2.2 bayon. sensor
G25.67 Separator G67.302 Pressure control module for EBS (1-channel-DRM) 007 Line identifier
G27.63 Silencer G67.303 Pressure control module for EBS (2-channel-DRM) for PA pipelines
G27.65 Silencer for valves with snap connection G7.304 Service brake valve, EBS
G27.66 Silencer for air dryer with snap connection G8.64 Parking brake with emergency release device
G4.200 4-circuit protection valve (5 connections, closing pressure
4.5 bar)
G5.121 Safety valve (17+2 bar) Electrical designation
G5.203 Pressure limiting valve (12/6.5+0.3 bar)
G5.204 Pressure limiting valve (10/7.0+0.3 bar) (B101) Central warning light, reservoir pressure sensor, front axle
G5.205 Pressure limiting valve (12/8.0-0.2 bar) (B102) Central warning light, reservoir pressure sensor, driven axle
G50.23 25l EC 12.5 bar (B109) Warning light, parking brake
G50.24 30l EC 12.5 bar (B131) Reservoir, air spring
G50.25 40l EC 12.5 bar (B230) Warning buzzer, parking brake
G50.29 20l EC 12.5 bar (B337) Operating value sensor
G50.32 6l EC 12.5 bar (Y102) Solenoid valve, engine stop, engine brake
G50.63 1l EC 12.5 bar (Y262) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, right)
G51.1 Drain valve with pin and ring (Y263) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, left)
G53.61 Filling connection (wing nut) (Y264) Pressure control module (2-channel) with control unit (rear axle)
G53.64 Closing nipple
G53.65 Dust cap
T 61-A1 7.20-2
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
001
G54.10
1 Shut-off pressure, pressure regulator
2 Reservoir pressure, front axle
3 002
Brake pressure, front axle
4 Reservoir pressure, driven axle
5 Brake pressure, driven axle
6 001
Reservoir pressure, parking brake
7 003
Parking brake 005
8 Reservoir pressure, door and 006

auxiliary consumers
9 Emergency release pressure, parking brake 007
10 Reservoir pressure, air spring
T 61-A1 7.20-3
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 7.21-1
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
Function diagram, brake EBS A03/A13/A33
Key
Device list for brake and compressed air systems G53.67 Filling connection Additions
See device list 81.52100.8197 for device names G53.70 Tyre inflating valve
Modification status: 05.01 G53.73 Test and filling connection 001 Mechanical
G54.10 PA pipe (M12x1.5) emergency release device
G1.1 Compressor, 2-cylinder (in-line), water-cooled G55.200 NC contact (5.8-0.4 bar) 002 Clutch actuator, door
G10.174 Diaphragm cylinder, right-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA) G55.206 NC contact (6.5-0.4 bar) for drain lock closing system, gearbox
G10.175 Diaphragm cylinder, left-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA) G55.208 NC contact (2.0+0.6 bar) for drain lock gearshift
G11.302 Combi.cylinder,right-type 24/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G56.2 For exhaust flap 003 Auxiliary consumers
G11.303 Combi.cylinder, left-type 24/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G57.10 Pressure sensor, 0-10 bar, warn press. 5, 2.0 ± 0.3
G14.201 Relay valve G6.2 Without return flow 6.5-0.3 bar 005 Speed sensor
G21.64 Two-way valve G6.64 Limited return flow 8.0+0.3 bar
G23.1 Non-return valve G61.200 NW 2.2 bayon. 006 Brake wear
G25.205 Air dryer with pressure regulator 12.5 bar (changeover G67.302 Pressure control module for EBS (1-channel-DRM) sensor
cartridge; with heater) G67.303 Pressure control module for EBS (2-channel-DRM) 007 Line identifier
G25.67 Separator G7.304 Service brake valve, EBS for PA pipelines
G27.65 Silencer for valves with snap connection G8.71 Parking brake with emergency release device
G27.66 Silencer for air dryer with snap connection
4.5 bar)
G5.121 Safety valve (17+2 bar)
G5.203 Pressure limiting valve (12/6.5+0.3 bar) Electrical designation
G5.205 Pressure limiting valve (12/8.0-0.2 bar) (B101) Central warning light, reservoir pressure sensor, front axle
G50.24 30l EC 12.5 bar (B102) Central warning light, reservoir pressure sensor, driven axle
G50.25 40l EC 12.5 bar (B107) Reservoir, parking brake
G50.32 6l EC 12.5 bar (B131) Reservoir, air spring
G51.1 Drain valve with pin and ring (Y262) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, right)
G53.61 Filling connection (wing nut) (Y263) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, left)
G53.64 Closing nipple (Y264) Pressure control module (2-channel) with control unit (rear axle)
G53.65 Dust cap
T 61-A1 7.21-2
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
001
002
003
G54.10/G54.200
1 Shut-off pressure, pressure regulator 005
001
006
3 Brake pressure, front axle
4 Reservoir pressure, driven axle 007

6 Reservoir pressure, parking brake
9 Emergency release pressure,
7 Parking brake parking brake
8 Reservoir pressure, door and
auxiliary consumers 10 Reservoir pressure, air spring
T 61-A1 7.21-3
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 7.22-1
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
Function diagram, brake EBS A25/A26/A30
Key
Device list for brake and compressed air systems Additions

See device list 81.52100.8197 for device names G51.1 Drain valve with pin and ring
Modification status: 05.01 G51.10 Drain valve 001 Mechanical
G53.61 Filling connection (wing nut) emergency release device
G1.1 Compressor, 2-cylinder (in-line), water-cooled G53.64 Closing nipple 002 Clutch actuator,
G10.302 Diaphragm cylinder, right-type 16 (disc brake D-ELSA) G53.65 Dust cap door closing system,
G10.303 Diaphragm cylinder, left-type 16 (disc brake D-ELSA) G53.67 Filling connection gearbox gearshift
G11.170 Combination cylinder-type 20/24 (disc brake D-ELSA) G53.73 Test and filling connection 003 Auxiliary consumers
G11.314 Combination cylinder-type 10/16 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G54.10 PA pipe (M12x1.5)
G14.201 Relay valve G55.200 NC contact (5.8-0.4 bar) 004 Air suspension
G14.65 Relay valve G55.201 NO contact (0.6-0.9 bar)
G21.11 Double check valve G55.208 NC contact (2.0+0.6 bar) for drain lock 005 Speed sensor
G21.64 Two-way valve G56.2 For exhaust flap
G22.62 Low-noise G57.10 Pressure sensor, 0-10 bar, warn. press. 5, 2.0 ± 0.3 006 Brake wear
G23.1 Non-return valve G57.300 Pressure sensor sensor
G25.205 Air dryer with pressure regulator 12.5 bar (changeover G6.2 Without return flow 6.5-0.3 bar 007 Line identifier
cartridge with heater) G6.64 Limited return flow 8.0+0.3 bar for PA pipelines
G25.67 Separator G61.200 NW 2.2 bayon.
G27.63 Silencer for valves G67.302 Pressure control module for EBS (1-channel-DRM)
G27.65 Silencer for valves with snap connection G67.303 Pressure control module for EBS (2-channel-DRM)
G27.66 Silencer for air dryer with snap connection G7.303 Service brake valve, EBS
G27.67 Silencer G8.64 Parking brake with emergency release device
4.5 bar) Electrical designation
G5.204 Pressure limiting valve (10/7.0+0.3 bar) (B102) Central warning light, reservoir pressure sensor, driven axle
G5.205 Pressure limiting valve (12/8.0-0.2 bar) (B107) Reservoir, parking brake
G50.32 6l EC 12.5 bar (B230) Parking brake applied
G50.33 20l EC 12.5 bar (doors and auxiliary consumers) (B337) Operating value sensor
G50.39 40l EC 12.5 bar (Y263) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, left)
G50.63 1l EC 12.5 bar (Y264) Pressure control module (2-channel) with control unit (rear axle)
T 61-A1 7.22-2
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
001 001
G54.10
001 001
4 Reservoir pressure, driven axle and
trailing axle
002
003
7 Parking brake 004
8 005 006 007

Reservoir pressure, door and
auxiliary consumers
9 Emergency release pressure, parking brake 10 Reservoir pressure, air spring
T 61-A1 7.22-3
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 7.23-1
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
Key
Device list for brake and compressed air systems

See device list 81.52100.8197 for device names Additions
001 Mechanical
G1.1 Compressor, 2-cylinder (in-line), water-cooled G53.61 Filling connection (wing nut) emergency release device
G10.174 Diaphragm cylinder, right-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA) G53.64 Closing nipple 002 Clutch actuator,
G10.175 Diaphragm cylinder, left-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA) G53.65 Dust cap door closing system,
G11.311 Combi.cylinder, left-type 20/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G53.67 Filling connection gearbox gearshift
G11.312 Combi.cylinder, right-type 20/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G53.73 Test and filling connection 003 Auxiliary consumers
G11.314 Combi. cylinder-type 10/16 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G54.10 PA pipe (M12x1.5)
G14.201 Relay valve G55.200 NC contact (5.8-0.4 bar) 005 Speed sensor
G14.66 Relay valve G55.208 NC contact (2.0+0.6 bar) for drain lock
G21.11 Double check valve G56.2 For exhaust flap 006 Brake wear
G21.64 Two-way valve G57.10 Pressure sensor, 0-10 bar, warn. press. 5, 2.0 ± 0.3 sensor
G23.1 Non-return valve G57.300 Pressure sensor 007 Line identifier
G25.205 Air dryer with pressure regulator 12.5 bar (changeover G6.2 Without return flow 6.5-0.3 bar for PA pipelines
cartridge; with heater) G6.64 Limited return flow 8.0+0.3 bar
G27.65 Silencer for valves with snap connection G61.200 NW 2.2 bayon.
G27.66 Silencer for air dryer with snap connection G67.302 Pressure control module for EBS (1-channel-DRM)
G27.67 Silencer G67.303 Pressure control module for EBS (2-channel-DRM)
G4.200 4-circuit protection valve (5 connections, closing pressure G7.304 Service brake valve, EBS
4.5 bar) G8.71 Parking brake with emergency release device
G5.203 Pressure limiting valve (12/6.5+0.3 bar) Electrical designation
G5.205 Pressure limiting valve (12/8.0-0.2 bar) (B101) Central warning light, reservoir pressure sensor, front axle
G50.24 30l EC 12.5 bar (B102) Central warning light, reservoir pressure sensor, driven axle
G50.25 40l EC 12.5 bar (B107) Reservoir, parking brake
G50.33 20l EC 12.5 bar (doors and auxiliary consumers) (Y262) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, right)
G50.63 1l EC 12.5 bar (Y263) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, left)
G51.1 Drain valve with pin and ring (Y264) Pressure control module (2-channel) with control unit (rear axle)
T 61-A1 7.23-2
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
001 001
G54.10/G54.200
001 001
trailing axle
5 Brake pressure, driven axle 002
003
7 Parking brake
005 006 007
auxiliary consumers
T 61-A1 7.23-3
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 7.24-1
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
Key
Device list for brake and compressed air systems Additions

See device list 81.52100.8197 for device names
Modification status: 05.01 001 Mechanical
G51.1 Drain valve with pin and ring emergency release device
G1.1 Compressor, 2-cylinder (in-line), water-cooled G53.61 Filling connection (wing nut) 002 Clutch actuator, door
G10.174 Diaphragm cylinder, right-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA) G53.64 Closing nipple closing system, gearbox
G10.175 Diaphragm cylinder, left-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA) G53.65 Dust cap gearshift, locking device
G11.311 Combi.cylinder, left-type 20/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G53.67 Filling connection for trailing axle
G11.312 Combi.cylinder, right-type 20/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G53.73 Test and filling connection 003 Auxiliary consumers
G11.314 Combi.cylinder-type 10/16 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G54.10 PA pipe (M12x1.5)
G14.201 Relay valve G55.200 NC contact (5.8-0.4 bar) 004 Air suspension
G14.66 Relay valve G55.201 NO contact (0.6-0.9 bar)
G21.11 Double check valve G55.208 NC contact (2.0+0.6 bar) for drain lock 005 Speed sensor
G21.64 Two-way valve G56.2 For exhaust flap
G22.62 Low-noise G57.10 Pressure sensor, 0-10 bar, warn. press. 5, 2.0 ± 0.3 006 Brake wear
G23.1 Non-return valve G57.300 Pressure sensor sensor
G25.67 Separator G6.64 Limited return flow 8.0+0.3 bar 007 Line identifier
G25.205 Air dryer with pressure regulator 12.5 bar (changeover G61.200 NW 2.2 bayon. for PA pipelines
cartridge; with heater) G67.302 Pressure control module for EBS (1-channel-DRM)
G27.63 Silencer G67.303 Pressure control module for EBS (2-channel-DRM)
G27.65 Silencer for valves with snap connection G7.304 Service brake valve, EBS
G27.66 Silencer for air dryer with snap connection G8.64 Parking brake with emergency release device
G27.67 Silencer
G4.200 4-circuit protection valve (5 conn., closing pressure 4.5 bar) Electrical designation
G5.204 Pressure limiting valve (10/7.0+0.3 bar) (B102) Central warning light, reservoir pressure sensor, driven axle
G5.205 Pressure limiting valve (12/8.0-0.2 bar) (B107) Reservoir, parking brake
G50.25 40l EC 12.5 bar (B230) Warning buzzer, parking brake
G50.33 20l EC 12.5 bar (doors and auxiliary consumers) (Y263) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, left)
G50.63 1l EC 12.5 bar (Y264) Pressure control module (2-channel) with control unit (rear axle)
T 61-A1 7.24-2
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
001 001
G54.10
1 002
Shut-off pressure, pressure regulator
001
trailing axle 005 003
5 Brake pressure, driven axle 006

6 Reservoir pressure, parking brake 004
007
7 Parking brake
auxiliary consumers
T 61-A1 7.24-3
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 7.25-1
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
Function diagram, brake EBS A20/A21/A22/A35/A37/486
Key

G1.1 Compressor, 2-cylinder (in-line), water-cooled G53.61 Filling connection (wing nut)
G10.302 Diaphragm cylinder, right-type 16 (disc brake D-ELSA) G53.64 Closing nipple Additions
G10.303 Diaphragm cylinder, left-type 16 (disc brake D-ELSA) G53.65 Dust cap
G11.313 Combi.cylinder-type 20/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G53.67 Filling connection 001 Mechanical
G14.201 Relay valve G53.70 Tyre inflating valve emergency release device
G21.64 Two-way valve G53.73 Test and filling connection 002 Clutch actuator, door
G23.1 Non-return valve G54.10 PA pipe (M12x1.5) closing system, gearbox
G25.67 Separator G55.200 NC contact (5.8-0.4 bar) gearshift
G25.204 Air dryer with pressure regulator 10 bar (changeover G55.201 NO contact (0.6-0.9 bar)
cartridge; with heating) G55.208 NC contact (2.0+0.6 bar) for drain lock 003 Auxiliary consumers
G27.63 Silencer G56.2 For exhaust flap
G27.65 Silencer for valves with snap connection G57.10 Pressure sensor, 0-10 bar, warn. press. 5, 2.0 ± 0.3 004 Air suspension
G27.66 Silencer for air dryer with snap connection G57.300 Pressure sensor
G4.200 4-circuit protection valve (5 connections, closing pressure G6.2 Without return flow 6.5-0.3 bar 005 Speed sensor
4.5 bar) G6.64 Limited return flow 8.0+0.3 bar
G5.121 Safety valve (17+2 bar) G61.200 NW 2.2 bayon. 007 Line identifier
G5.203 Pressure limiting valve (12/6.5+0.3 bar) G67.302 Pressure control module for EBS (1-channel-DRM) for PA pipelines
G5.204 Pressure limiting valve (10/7.0+0.3 bar) G67.303 Pressure control module for EBS (2-channel-DRM) 008 Only in A20/A21/A22 for
G5.205 Pressure limiting valve (12/8.0-0.2 bar) G7.304 Service brake valve, EBS ECAS with kneeling
G50.32 6l EC 12.5 bar G8.64 Parking brake with emergency release device No 20l reservoir in A35
G50.33 20l EC 12.5 bar (doors and auxiliary consumers)
G50.38 25l EC 12.5 bar Electrical designation
G50.39 40l EC 12.5 bar
G50.86 6l EC 12.5 bar (for A21)
G51.1 Drain valve with pin and ring
G51.10 Drain valve
T 61-A1 7.25-2
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
005 001
002
003
G54.10
001
6 Reservoir pressure, parking brake 005 005
007
7 Parking brake
008
004
auxiliary consumers
9 Emergency release pressure, parking 10 Reservoir pressure, air spring
brake
T 61-A1 7.25-3
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 7.26-1
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
Function diagram, brake EBS A23/A24/489
Key

Modification status: 05.01 Additions
G1.1 Compressor, 2-cylinder (in-line), water-cooled G53.61 Filling connection (wing nut) 001 Mechanical
G10.302 Diaphragm cylinder, right-type 16 (disc brake D-ELSA) G53.64 Closing nipple emergency release device
G10.303 Diaphragm cylinder, left-type 16 (disc brake D-ELSA) G53.65 Dust cap 002 Clutch actuator,
G11.313 Combi.cylinder-type 20/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G53.67 Filling connection door closing system,
G14.201 Relay valve G53.70 Tyre inflation connection gearbox gearshift
G21.64 Two-way valve G53.73 Test and filling connection 003 Auxiliary consumers
G22.200 Low-noise G54.10 PA pipe (M12x1.5)
G23.1 Non-return valve G55.200 NC contact (5.8-0.4 bar) 004 Air suspension
G25.204 Air dryer with pressure regulator 10 bar (changeover G55.201 NO contact (0.6-0.9 bar)
cartridge; with heating) G55.208 NC contact (2.0+0.6 bar) for drain lock 005 Speed sensor
G25.67 Separator G56.2 For exhaust flap
G27.63 Silencer G57.10 Pressure sensor, 0-10 bar, warn. press. 5, 2.0 ± 0.3 006 Brake wear
G27.65 Silencer for valves with snap connection G57.300 Pressure sensor sensor
G27.66 Silencer for air dryer with snap connection G6.2 Without return flow 6.5-0.3 bar 007 Line identifier
G4.200 4-circuit protection valve (5 connections, closing pressure G6.64 Limited return flow 8.0+0.3 bar for PA pipelines
4.5 bar) G61.200 NW 2.2 bayon. 008 door closing system
G5.121 Safety valve (17+2 bar) G67.302 Pressure control module for EBS (1-channel-DRM)
G5.203 Pressure limiting valve (12/6.5+0.3 bar) G67.303 Pressure control module for EBS (2-channel-DRM)
G5.204 Pressure limiting valve (10/7.0+0.3 bar) G7.304 Service brake valve, EBS
G5.205 Pressure limiting valve (12/8.0-0.2 bar) G8.64 Parking brake with emergency release device
G50.33 20l EC 12.5 bar (doors and auxiliary consumers)
G50.35 30l EC 12.5 bar
G50.38 25l EC 12.5 bar
G50.39 40l EC 12.5 bar
G50.63 1l EC 12.5 bar
G50.86 6l EC 12.5 bar
G51.10 Drain valve
T 61-A1 7.26-2
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
001 001
008
002
003
G54.10
004
4 Reservoir pressure, centre axle 001 001
5 Brake pressure, centre axle

005
006
8 Reservoir pressure, parking brake 007
9 Parking brake
10 Emergency release pressure, 11 Reservoir pressure, auxiliary 12 Reservoir pressure, air spring
parking brake consumers
T 61-A1 7.26-3
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 7.27-1
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
Function diagram, brake EBS R02
Key Additions
Modification status: 12.00 001 Mechanical emergency release device
Device list for brake and compressed air systems 002 Isolating point, drive module
Modification status: 05.01 003 Auxiliary consumers
G1.1 Compressor, 2-cylinder (in-line), water-cooled 004 Air suspension

G10.174 Diaphragm cylinder, right-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA)
G10.175 Diaphragm cylinder, left-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA) 005 Speed sensor
G11.311 Combi.cylinder, left-type 20/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA)
G11.312 Combi.cylinder, right-type 20/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) 006 Brake wear sensor
G14.300 Relay valve
G21.64 Two-way valve 007 Axle load sensor for ALB
G23.1 Non-return valve
G25.300 ECAM (changeover cartridge) 008 Door closing system
G27.46 Breather element (snap connection/hose)
G27.66 Silencer for air dryer with snap connection 009 Warning light, parking brake
G5.205 Pressure limiting valve (12/8.0-0.2 bar)
G50.24 30l EC 12.5 bar
G50.25 40l EC 12.5 bar
G50.29 20l EC 12.5 bar
G50.64 1l EC 12.5 bar
G53.61 Filling connection (wing nut)
G54.10 PA pipe (M12x1.5) Electrical designation
G55.300 NC contact (pressure sensor)
G57.300 Pressure sensor (A409) Control unit, ECAM
G6.2 Without return flow (6.5-0.3 bar) (B336) ALB sensor
G6.9 Without return flow (4.5-0.3 bar) (B337) Operating value sensor
G67.302 Pressure control module for EBS (1-channel-DRM) (B369) Pressure switch, check lamp, parking brake
G67.303 Pressure control module for EBS (2-channel-DRM) (Y262) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, right)
G7.304 Service brake valve, EBS (Y263) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, left)
G8.71 Parking brake system with emergency release device (Y264) Pressure control module (2-channel) with control unit (rear axle)
T 61-A1 7.27-2
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
001
008 003
007 009
001
002
005
G54.200
G54.10 006
1 004
Reservoir pressure, front axle
6 Parking brake
7 Reservoir pressure, door and auxiliary consumers
8 Emergency release pressure, parking brake
9 Shut-off pressure and reservoir pressure, air spring
T 61-A1 7.27-3
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
T 61-A1 7.28-1
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
Function diagram, brake EBS R03
Key Additions
Modification status: 12.00 001 Mech. emergency release device
Device list for brake and compressed air systems 002 To gearbox (see installation
See device list 81.52100.8197 for device names diagram, AS-Tronic)
Modification status: 05.01 003 Auxiliary consumers
G1.1 Compressor, 2-cylinder (in-line), water-cooled G6.2 Without return flow (6.5-0.3 bar) 004 Air suspension
G10.174 Diaphragm cylinder, right-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA) G6.9 Without return flow (4.5-0.3 bar)
G10.175 Diaphragm cylinder, left-type 20 (disc brake D-ELSA) G61.200 NW 2.2 bayon. 005 Speed sensor
G11.311 Combi.cylinder, left-type 20/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G67.302 Press.ctrl.module for EBS (1-channel-DRM)
G11.312 Combi.cylinder, right-type 20/24 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G67.303 Press.ctrl.module for EBS (2-channel-DRM) 006 Brake wear sensor
G11.314 Combi.cylinder-type 10/16 (piston rod 20mm/D-ELSA) G7.304 Service brake valve, EBS
G14.300 Relay valve G8.71 Parking brake with emerg. release device 007 Axle load sensor for ALB
G14.66 Relay valve (lead 0.4)
G21.11 Double check valve (opening at low pressure) 008 Door closing system
G21.64 Two-way valve
G23.1 Non-return valve 009 Warning light, parking brake
G25.300 ECAM (changeover cartridge)
G27.46 Breather element (snap connection/hose)
G27.66 Silencer for air dryer with snap connection
G27.67 Silencer
G5.205 Pressure limiting valve (12/8.0-0.2 bar)
G50.24 30l EC 12.5 bar
G50.25 40l EC 12.5 bar
G50.29 20l EC 12.5 bar Electrical designation
G50.33 20l EC 12.5 bar
G50.64 1l EC 12.5 bar (A409) Control unit, ECAM
G51.1 Drain valve with pin and ring (B336) ALB sensor
G53.61 Filling connection (wing nut) (B337) Operating value sensor
G54.10 PA pipe (M12x1.5) (B369) Pressure switch, check lamp, parking brake
G55.300 NC contact (pressure sensor) (Y262) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, right)
G56.2 Exhaust flap (Y263) Pressure control module (1-channel) with control unit (front axle, left)
G57.300 Pressure sensor (Y264) Pressure control module (2-channel) with control unit (rear axle)
T 61-A1 7.28-2
FUNCTION DIAGRAMS
001 001
008 003 002
009
007
001 001
005
G54.10 006
004
6 Parking brake
7 Reservoir pressure, door and auxiliary consumers
8 Emergency release pressure, parking brake
9 Shut-off pressure and reservoir pressure, air spring
T 61-A1 7.28-3
DIAGNOSIS
Offboard/onboard diagnosis
Malfunction indicator and emergency functions
EBS malfunctions are indicated by a warning light and the instrument panel display or MAN-cats display.
A new attempt is made to start EBS when the ignition is switched "ON" again. If the malfunction is still
present and is detected, the light and the emergency function are activated but the fault is not stored again.
A malfunction is detected when a certain time passes by after the fault occurs.
The malfunction is then classified as a "permanent" fault.
Certain EBS functions are switched off, depending on the type and the severity of the fault.
These faults and the resultant operating state (back-up level) are indicated on the following chart.
EBS function levels
The scope of function changes after a malfunction is detected in the system. Subfunctions of the basic
function are deactivated or switched to the pneumatic back-up circuit (back-up levels).
Function
level 1 1a 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Function
Control unit • • • • • • • • • • ♦ ---
Pressure control • • • • • • • ♦ ♦ ♦ --- ---

module
EPB • • • • • • • ♦ --- --- --- ---
Back-up circuit + + + + + + +
♦ • • • •
ALB • • • • --- • • ♦ --- --- --- ---
ABS • • • • • ♦ --- ♦ --- --- --- ---

ASR-MR • --- • • • --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
ASR-MR • • • • • --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
DBR • • • --- • --- --- --- --- --- --- ---
Speed sensor • • • • • ♦ --- ♦ • • --- ---
BVS • • --- • • • • ♦ • • --- ---
BVA • • • --- • • • • • • --- ---
Brake power • • • • • • • • • --- • ---
sensor
Trailer CAN
Brake CAN • • • • • • • ♦ • • --- ---
General CAN • --- • • • • • • • • --- ---
• = Functioning
♦ = Partially functioning (individual components have failed or one component only partially functioning)
--- = Not functioning
+ = Ready
T 61-A1 8.10 - 1
DIAGNOSIS
Description of function levels
Level Description
EBS functions without restrictions in the tractor or trailer. If the yellow warning light comes on
1 in this state, then only 1-wire communication via trailer CAN or EOL adjustment not performed
(fault code 3011).
EBS functions without restriction except for ASR engine control and/or general CAN
1a communication and the associated functions.
The trailer EBS functions are maintained via the 5-pole trailer plug connection and the sensed
2 pneumatic activation pressure for the trailer.
3 The brake wear monitor has failed. All other EBS functions are available.
EBS functions function without restrictions. The EBS control unit continues to attempt to
4 activate the sustained-action brake and/or brake pad wear sensor.
EBS operates using the EOL-programmed value "L = ALB-Fehl" (ALB fault) for brake
5 pressure distribution when braking with service brake (EPB) and using the ALB value L = 0 in
the case of ABS for IRM (modified individual control) on the front axle.
The brake pressure in the control channel concerned is controlled based on the electrical
setpoint (EPB). In the case of ABS, the wheel with the defective speed sensor is treated as if
6 it were running unlocked on the road with high coefficient of friction. The brake pressure is
adjusted based on the IRM (modified individual control) and IR (individual control) conditions
that apply to the axle/pressure control channel. The ASR functions (brake and engine control)
are deactivated. The sustained-action brake output is not activated.
The brake pressure at the control channel concerned is controlled based on the electrical
7 setpoint (EPB). The vehicle has no ABS. The ASR functions (brake and engine control) are
deactivated. The sustained-action brake output is not activated.
The pressure control module concerned is de-energised. The axle concerned is braked via
8 the pneumatic back-up circuit, even if a pressure control module is still intact. There is no ALB
control and no ABS control. The ASR functions (brake and engine control) are deactivated.
The EBS control unit and pressure control module are energised, all sensor signals are
9 processed. Communication is maintained between the pressure control module and EBS
control unit. Solenoid valves remain in the basic position. They are not electrically activated.
Braking is via the pneumatic back-up circuit (without ALB, ABS, ASR).
The EBS control unit and pressure control module are energised. The signals in the pressure
control module are processed and communication is maintained between the pressure control
10 module and EBS control unit. The EBS control unit always sends the setpoint "zero" to the
pressure control module. Braking is via the pneumatic back-up circuit. There is no ALB control
and no ASR control (brake and engine controller).
All pressure control modules are de-energised. The EBS control unit is energised. Braking is
11 via the pneumatic back-up circuit. The system has no ALB, no ABS and no ASR (brake and
engine controller).
The EBS is de-energised. Braking is via the pneumatic back-up circuit. The system has no
12 ALB, no ABS and no ASR (brake and engine controller).
8.10 - 2 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Offboard diagnosis
The SPN fault codes can be read out from the fault memory of the EBS control unit (A402) using MAN-cats I
(connection on 37-pole diagnosis socket X200). The results are displayed on the MAN-cats display.
Single exception:
In the case of R02 and R03 buses and coaches, the EBS control unit fault memory is read out using
MAN-cats II.
In the case of vehicles without New Electronic Structure (NES), the 37-pole diagnosis socket (X200) is
located on the driver's partition behind the driver's seat on the left-hand side, e.g. in A25, A26 and A30
buses and coaches.
X200
In the case of vehicles with New Electronic Structure (NES), the 37-pole diagnosis socket (X200) is located
on the driver's partition in front of the 1st row of seats on the left-hand side, e.g. in A25, A26 and A30
buses and coaches.
X200
T 61-A1 8.10 - 3
DIAGNOSIS
The check lamps listed below come on to indicate certain faults:
− In the following buses and coaches: A20, A21, A22, A23, A24, A25, A26, A30 and A35
--- Check lamp, brake pad wear - appears as icon on the display
--- Check lamp, ASR info. (information indicator) - appears as icon on the display
H139 Check lamp, ABS-tractor (yellow)
H270 Check lamp, spring actuator, reservoir (red)
− In the following buses and coaches: A01, A03, A04, A13, A32 and A33
H373 Check lamp, brake pad wear
H140 Check lamp, ASR info. (information indicator)
H139 Check lamp, ABS-tractor (yellow)
H108 Check lamp, general brake check (red)
− In the following buses and coaches: R02 and R03
--- Check lamp, brake pad wear - appears as icon on the display;
with central STOP warning light H111 (yellow)
--- Check lamp, ASR info. (information indicator) - appears as icon on the display
H107 Check lamp, ABS-tractor/trailer (yellow) with central STOP warning light H111 (yellow)
H108 Check lamp, general brake check (red) with central warning light H111 (red)
Check lamp and fault message indicators based on the example of A25, A26 and A30 buses and
coaches
The ASR info. check lamp - also referred to as an 1 2

information indicator – is activated by the EBS
control unit:
− for 3 seconds after the ignition is switched "ON"
− when the anti-spin regulator is active (engine or
brake control)
− if there is an interface fault between the EBS and
EDC control units (see figure opposite)
− and flashes (1 second on, 1.5 seconds off) when Interface fault
the ASR shut-off button (switch) (S281) is used to EBS-EDC
switch on the ASR spin increase, selected by
3
means of EOL programming
The yellow early warning check lamp H214 (1) and ASR info. check lamp (2) come on and, after the
display changeover button S328 (3) (located on the right next to the display) is actuated, the image
above appears on the display (e.g. if an EBS/EDC interface fault is detected)
8.10 - 4 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
The brake pad wear check lamp (1) comes on

when the brake pad wear sensor detects a voltage
value that corresponds to the EOL-programmed limit
value.
The opposite image indicated on the display appears

whilst the vehicle is in motion when the brake pads
are approaching their wear limit.
The yellow tractor ABS check lamp H139 (1)

comes on 2
− if the limit gap speed in the last power-on cycle
was in a predefined interval without the limit value
for fault indication being exceeded, it flashes
three times (1 second on, 1.5 seconds off) after
the ignition is switched "ON" and the 3-second
lamp test
− if faults in the electrical system cause failure of No EBS/ABS
open and closed-loop control functions; however fault indication
the legally required service brake effect is still 1
reached on roads with high coefficient of friction 3
(see figure opposite).
− after EOL programming; reset by switching
ignition "OFF"/"ON"
The yellow tractor ABS check lamp H139 (1) and the yellow early warning check lamp H214 (2) come
on and, after the display changeover button S328 (3) (located on the right next to the display) is
actuated, the image above appears on the display (e.g. in the event of a missing EBS/ABS fault signal).
The red spring actuator reservoir check lamp

2
H270 (1) comes on:
− if the reservoir pressure is too low
− if a system fault is detected (braking effect no
longer meets legal requirements)
(see image opposite)
− if plug connections are not connected
EBS fault
The red spring actuator reservoir check lamp STOP
H270 (1) and the red alarm check lamp H213 (2) 1
come on. The image opposite appears on the
display (e.g. if an EBS system fault is detected)
After EOL programming and repairs, the entire brake system, including the pneumatic back-up circuit, is
checked for correct functioning. This procedure includes checking of the connected pneumatic and
electrical lines to the valves, sensors and the EBS electronic control unit (A402).
T 61-A1 8.10 - 5
DIAGNOSIS
R02/R03 malfunction indicators
The EBS electronic control unit (A402) has self-diagnosis functions for all outputs and various inputs. The
faults at the inputs and outputs, as well as internal faults, are detected, analysed and stored in the control
unit fault memory.
The faults are also indicated on the instrument panel display and/or by the central warning light (H111) in
conjunction with the check lamp for the system concerned (e.g. EBS).
For example, priority-2 fault critical to function whilst the vehicle is in motion and at a standstill:
The central warning light (H111) and the general brake check lamp (H108) light up RED. The following
message, for example, appears on the display: "EBS failure".
In the case of STOP warnings, the word STOP also appears on the display and the central warning light
(H111) flashes RED at 1 Hz intervals.
When the central warning light (H111) comes on, the colour indicates the vehicle status:
− YELLOW to indicate either a function or a warning
− RED to indicate a fault
Red always has priority over yellow. Functions or warnings (YELLOW) are always overridden by faults (RED).
The general brake check lamp (H108) always lights up RED.
Faults are indicated by the central warning light (H111) and supporting display message. In the event of a
CAN failure (instrumentation - central on-board computer), the central warning light (H111)
lights up RED.
All current malfunction indicators are available when the ignition is switched "ON" (terminal 15), irrespective
of the vehicle status.
The faults diagnosed and stored in the control unit may involve different risks. Therefore, each individual
fault is assigned a priority.
Indicator priorities
The display can not show all the information at once. It therefore shows information according to priorities.
Lower-priority information can be overwritten by higher-priority information.
Pieces of information that have the same priority are shown alternately if there is not enough room on the
display.
Diagnosis requires priorities 1 - 5.
Some function indicators have the same or a higher priority than fault indicators. In other words, a
function indicator (YELLOW) can have the same priority as a RED fault or even a STOP fault.
If the display area is already full and additional function indicators and fault indicators with the same
priority occur, the function indicator is given priority.
Indicator/diagnosis priorities
Diagnosis priority Indicator meaning Colour of central Diagnosis meaning

warning light (H111)
1 Indicator critical to RED flashing Drivability or safety is endangered
safety (STOP fault, RED)
2 Indicator critical to RED steady light Driving information with
functioning recommended action, check
(RED fault)
3 Indicator not necessary YELLOW steady light Information before starting to drive
for purely normal or active safety not restricted
operation (YELLOW fault)
4 --- --- No effect on drivability
5 Information about fault YELLOW steady light Warning
whilst vehicle in motion (YELLOW fault)
8.10 - 6 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
The display only ever shows one fault at a time.
Structure of fault texts in diagnostic message
There are 2 lines of 16 characters available for the fault texts in the diagnostic message.
The fault text message structure always includes

− fault location/fault designation
− fault information/recommended action
There are 2 types of fault text messages:

− global fault text messages
− concrete fault text messages
Global fault text message
In the global fault text message, only the priority and the source address from the DM1 message
(diagnosis message 1) are evaluated. A general message is displayed, indicating the defective system
and the transmitted fault number.
Diagnosis Central Fault text Remarks

priority warning light 1234567890123456
1 RED Sysname no. xxxxx-yy In conjunction with STOP symbol.
flashing Diagnosis Engine must be stopped!
2 RED Sysname no. xxxxx-yy Possibly workshop-relevant fault!
steady light Diagnosis Indicates malfunction
3 YELLOW Sysname no. xxxxx-yy Display at standstill, fault info. only;
steady light Diagnosis no recommended action necessary
4 --- --- No display
5 YELLOW Sysname no. xxxxx-yy Display when vehicle in motion and at
steady light Diagnosis standstill; fault info. only
− "Sysname": Indicates the defective system from the source address of DM1 (e.g.: EBS)
− "xxxxx-yy": Indicates the fault number (03036) from the fault location number SPN in the DM1
message and the fault type FMI (00)
SPN --> Suspect Parameter Number (fault location)

FMI --> Failure Mode Identification (fault type)
Concrete fault text message
In the case of the concrete fault text message, the priority, SPN fault number and fault type (FMI)
transmitted in the DM1 message are also evaluated. There is concrete recommended action and concrete
naming of the fault cause.
The SPN fault number is not displayed in the case of concrete fault text messages. The concrete fault text
message is triggered when the source address of the DM1 message "Onboard Diagnostic Unit" is
indicated.
Note: Several different faults can trigger the same concrete fault text message.
T 61-A1 8.10 - 7
DIAGNOSIS
Fault indication on request
Faults present can be read out on the driver's display using the menu structure from the main "Diagnosis"
menu.
Check whether there is a fault indicated:
The menu structure is controlled using buttons 1 and 2 .

There are two ways of using the buttons:
PRESSING and TOUCHING
− PRESSING - press and hold (for more than 3
seconds), e.g. to call up the menu or to confirm.
− TOUCHING - briefly press (for less than 2 seconds),
e.g. to scroll through the menu or to exit the menu.
The functions performed by button 1 are indicated by

left-hand icon 3 whilst those performed by button 2 are
indicated by right-hand icon 4 on the driver's display.
MENU
How to access the menu structure: Press button 1
(>3 sec):
> VEHICLE CONFIG.
OPERATING DATA
Various menus are available, depending on the vehicle
operating state: DIAGNOSIS
Operating state Available main menus
Ignition on VEHICLE CONFIG.
Vehicle stationary OPERATING DATA
Engine off. DIAGNOSIS
LAMP TEST
MAINTENANCE
1ST REGISTERED
TRAILER CONFIG.
Ignition on
Vehicle stationary OPERATING DATA
Engine on.
Press button 1 (<2 sec) to switch from a main menu to another menu.
Press button 2 (<2 sec) to access the submenus in the current main menu.
Main menu display (depending on the vehicle operating state):
VEHICLE OPERATING DIAGNOSIS LAMP TEST MAINTENANCE 1ST TRAILER CONFIG.

CONFIG. DATA REGISTERED
Button 2 Button 2 Button 2 Button 2 Button 2 Button 2 Button 2
Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu Submenu
8.10 - 8 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
The "DIAGNOSIS" main menu contains further submenus, the number of which depends on how many
systems are installed in the vehicle. These submenus display the content of the relevant fault memory.
MENU
VEHICLE CONFIG.
Button 1 <2 sec OPERATING DATA
>DIAGNOSIS
LAMP TEST Button 1 <2 sec
MAINTENANCE
1ST REGISTERED
TRAILER CONFIG.
ê è
Button 2 <2 sec
DIAGNOSIS
>ZBR
EBS
ECAM
EDC
FFR
DIAG
ECAS
RET S
INST ê è
Button 1 <2 sec Button 2 <2 sec
DIAGNOSIS
ZBR ZBR fault!
>EBS Code OK
ECAM
EDC
FFR Button 2 <2 sec
DIAG
ECAS
RET S
INST ê è
DIAGNOSIS
ECAM EBS fault!
EDC Code OK
FFR
DIAG
ECAS Button 2 <2 sec
RET S
INST
>
ë OK
T 61-A1 8.10 - 9
DIAGNOSIS
The table below explains what the abbreviations used in the submenus mean.
Abbreviations Meaning
ZBR Central on-board computer 2
EBS Electronic brake system
ECAM Electronically controlled air management
EDC Electronic diesel control
FFR Vehicle management computer
DIAG Entire vehicle (on-board diagnosis memory)
ECAS Electronically controlled air suspension
RET S Retarder/Intarder, secondary
TCU Transmission control unit (automated/automatic gearbox)
INST Instrumentation
ACC Adaptive cruise control
KSM Customer-specified module
M-TCO Tachograph
If buttons 1 or 2 are not pressed within a certain time (approx. 30 seconds), the menu structure
disappears automatically and is replaced by the display that appeared before the menu structure was
accessed.
8.10 - 10 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Diagnosis button
Do-it-yourself
The diagnosis button is not part of the scope of delivery and therefore has to be made (DIY).
As different plug connections are used for trucks and buses/coaches, it is advisable to equip the diagnosis
button with an adapter cable line for all applications.
The following parts are required in addition to the components above:
Diagnosis button Plug connection X124, X201 and X202 (2-pole)

Button 81.25503.0108 Contact for plug housing 0429 and 0475: 07.91202.2618
Cover 81.25503.0106 Contact for socket housing 0423 and 0474: 07.91201.2908
Bulb 81.25901.0062
Plug connection X202 (4-pole)

Contact for plug housing 0611: 07.91201.0646
Contact for socket housing 0281: 07.91202.0610

X201 Connector, voltage supply, diagnosis X124 Plug conn., instrument panel to driver's door
Pin 1 Voltage supply, terminal 15 Pin 1 Ground, terminal 31
Pin 2 Ground, terminal 31 Pin 2 Not used
Pin 3 Voltage supply, terminal 15
X202 Plug conn., diagnosis (flashing code), 2-pole Pin 4 Flashing code
Pin 1 Flashing code Pin 5 Not used
Pin 2 Interrogation line (L) Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
X202 Plug conn., diagnosis (flashing code), 4-pole Pin 8 Interrogation line (L)
Pin 1 Flashing code
Pin 2 Interrogation line (L)
Pin 3 Ground, terminal 31
Pin 4 Voltage supply, terminal 15 (*). In systems which use a positive-controlled check lamp, this pin is
grounded.
T 61-A1 8.10 - 11
DIAGNOSIS
Flashing code output
The diagnosis button is connected to the diagnosis plug connection (flashing code) (X202) for outputting
the flashing code. The diagnosis button is pressed for at least 2 seconds after the ignition is switched "ON".
The flashing code is output after the button is released. The check lamp built into the diagnosis button and
the "ASR" symbol indicated on the instrument panel display/panel of check lamps (information indicator -
INA lamp) indicate the adaptation and fault messages by flashing. Refer to the SPN and flashing code list
for the meaning of the different flashing signals.
After the ignition is switched "ON" ("voltage terminal 15 on" signal), the diagnosis button is pressed for at
least 2 seconds. The fault code for all bytes is then output, in 2 flashing blocks in each case. The 1st block
indicates the defective component (EBS control unit, pressure control modules, brake pad sensors, 1st,
2nd and 3rd axle, ALB sensor on rear axle, ...) whilst the 2nd block indicates the fault type. There is a
1.5-second interval between the 1st block and 2nd block. The interval between 2 faults is 4.5 seconds. All
stored faults are output, i.e. from the oldest fault to the last stored fault (refer to the flashing code charts for
the meaning of the flashing codes). The flashing frequency is 1 Hz.
After all the faults have been remedied, pressing the diagnosis button for at least 1 second after the ignition
has been switched "ON" ("voltage terminal 15" signal) clears the EBS control unit (A402) fault memory.
Press and hold Oldest fault (flashing code) is output first Then the next fault is output
diagnosis btn. 7 2 2 3
1st block 2nd block 1st block 2nd block
≥ 2 sec 1.5 sec 1.5 sec 4.5 sec 1.5 sec
1st block 2nd block 1st block 2nd block
t
4.5 sec 1.5 sec 4.5 sec 1.5 sec
Then the next fault is output Last fault (no fault)

10 4 2 1
Checking the functions
After EOL programming and repairs, the entire brake system, including the pneumatic back-up circuit, is
checked for correct functioning. This procedure includes checking of the connected pneumatic and
electrical lines to the valves, sensors and the EBS electronic control unit (A402).
Pressing the diagnosis button for at least 5 seconds triggers chassis dynamometer mode, indicated by the
flashing information indicator lamp. Start-off detection and ASR engine control are deactivated when
chassis dynamometer mode is activated during the function test on fast-running chassis dynamometers.
Chassis dynamometer mode is deactivated at speeds of less than > 8 km/h and when the ignition is
switched "OFF"/"ON".
The memory is cleared if the diagnosis button is pressed for approx. 1 second when the ignition is switched
"ON".
8.10 - 12 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
SPN and flashing code list (fault codes)
The following table lists the fault codes that appear on the MAN-cats display in the event of a fault
(SPN -Suspect Parameter Number - fault location).
EBS control unit fault messages
Check lamps
SPN Flash. SPN plain text Section/
code page
03000 2 1 No fault 8.11 - 1
03001 2 2 Control unit defective; unknown µC X 8.11 - 1
interrupt, µC self-test, RAM or ROM test
03002 2 3 Control unit defective; timeout for data X 8.11 - 2
exchange µC active - µC passive
03003 2 4 Control unit defective; redundancy fault, µC X 8.11 - 2
input signal
03004 2 5 Control unit defective; testsum data X 8.11 - 3
exchange µC active - µC passive
03005 2 6 Control unit defective; EEPROM fault: X 8.11 - 3
Checksum not correct
03006 2 15 No valid fault definition ---
03009 2 10 Control unit defective; redundancy fault, µC X 8.11 - 4
output signal
03010 2 11 Control unit defective; wheel diameter X 8.11 - 4
compensating value not correct
03011 2 12 Control unit defective; fault in service brake X 8.11 - 5
valve curve
03012 2 13 Control unit defective; incompatibility in data X 8.11 - 5
record version number
03013 2 14 Control unit defective; curve in EEPROM not X 8.11 - 6
plausible
Analogue signal fault messages
Check lamps
code page
03020 3 2 Defective supply voltage (5 volts) for X 8.11 - 6
analogue sensors
T 61-A1 8.10 - 13
DIAGNOSIS
Analogue signal fault messages
Check lamps
code page
03021 3 3 Defective service brake valve-potentiometer X 8.11 - 7
signal
03022 3 4 Defective axle load, sensor 1 X 8.11 - 7
03023 3 5 Defective axle load, sensor 2 X 8.11 - 8
03024 3 6 Brake pad wear: Incorrect tendency X 8.11 - 9
between the axles
between the wheels of axle 1
03028 3 10 Brake pad wear: Incorrect tendency 8.11 - 10
Fault messages, feedback signals
Check lamps
code page
03030 4 2 Defective brake pad wear and sustained- X 8.11 - 11
action brake relay output stage feedback
03031 4 3 Defective sustained-action brake relay X 8.11 - 11
output stage feedback
03032 4 4 Defective brake pad wear output stage X 8.11 - 12
feedback
03036 4 8 Short-circuit at one of module output stages X 8.11 - 12
Fault messages, engine interface
Check lamps
code page
03041 15 1 Engine interface, DKV input permanently X ---
low, > 400 ms
03042 15 2 Engine interface, DKV input permanently X ---
high, > 400 ms
8.10 - 14 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Fault messages, engine interface
Check lamps
code page
03043 15 3 Engine interface, DKV input frequency X ---
> 220 Hz
03044 15 4 Engine interface, DKV input frequency X ---
< 120 Hz
03045 15 5 Engine interface, DKV input, mark-to-space X ---
ratio < 5%
03046 15 6 Engine interface, DKV input, mark-to-space X ---
ratio > 95%
03047 15 7 DKV input permanently low or high X ---
80 ..... 400 ms
Fault messages, CAN databus
Check lamps
code page
03049 15 9 CAN data bus, drive train, receive time X ---
exceeded
03050 15 10 CAN data bus, drive train, bus off X 8.11 - 13
03051 15 11 CAN data bus, drive train, receive time X 8.11 - 13
exceeded for message EEC1 from EDC
exceeded for message ERC1_D from
retarder
exceeded for message ERC1_E from
retarder
exceeded for message ERC1_EX from
vehicle management computer
03059 6 4 CAN databus, drive train, receive time X 8.11 - 15
exceeded for message "High Resolution
Vehicle Distance" from tachograph
exceeded for message "Supply pressure"
from ECAM
T 61-A1 8.10 - 15
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
exceeded for message "Cruise
Control/Vehicle Speed" from EDC via
vehicle management computer
exceeded for message "vehicle weight
measurement" from ECAS
03064 6 9 CAN data bus, drive train, values for vehicle X 8.11 - 16
weight in the message "Vehicle Weight"
from ECAS out of range
03065 6 10 CAN data bus, drive train, receive time ---
exceeded for message TSC1_ACC from
ACC
exceeded for message TCO1 from
tachograph
03068 6 13 CAN databus, drive train, values for X ---
message "TCO1-Vehicle Speed" from
tachograph not plausible
exceeded for message
AUX_STAT_ZBR_TR
exceeded for message ETC2 from vehicle
management computer
exceeded
exceeded
exceeded
exceeded
exceeded
8.10 - 16 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
Fault messages, pressure control module (1-channel), left on the front axle
Check lamps
code page
03100 2 1 Pressure control module, front axle, left, no ---
fault
03101 7 1 Pressure control module, front axle, left, X 8.11 - 17
interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor A
wheel sensor A: Deceleration excessive
wheel sensor A: Starting-off fault
wheel sensor A: Excessive clearance
perpetual control, wheel sensor A
03106 7 1 Pressure control module, front axle, left, long X 8.11 - 20
instability, wheel sensor A
pulse ring fault, wheel sensor A
03108 7 1 Pressure control module, front axle, left, fault X 8.11 - 21
on lifting axle, wheel sensor A
valid fault definition
interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor B
T 61-A1 8.10 - 17
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
wheel sensor B: Deceleration excessive
wheel sensor B: Starting-off fault
wheel sensor B: Excessive clearance
perpetual control, wheel sensor B
03116 7 2 Pressure control module, front axle, left, long X 8.11 - 25
instability, wheel sensor B
pulse ring fault, wheel sensor B
03118 7 2 Pressure control module, front axle, left, fault X 8.11 - 26
on lifting axle, wheel sensor B
fault, voltage supply, pad wear sensor
03121 7 3 Pressure control module, front axle, left, pad X 8.11 - 27
wear sensor A out of permitted value range
03122 7 3 Pressure control module, front axle, left, pad X 8.11 - 27
wear sensor B out of permitted value range
pressure sensor out of permitted value
range
03124 7 4 Pressure control module, front axle, left, time X 8.11 - 28
for inquiry "current pressure" too long
poor ventilation
excessive pressure during pulse test
residual pressure after braking
fault, pressure sensor without braking
wheel sensor IC defective
defective back-up valve, feedback
defective inlet valve, feedback
defective inlet and back-up valve, feedback
8.10 - 18 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
defective outlet valve, feedback
defective outlet and back-up valve, feedback
defective outlet and inlet valve, feedback
defective outlet and inlet and back-up valve,
feedback
03140 7 5 Pressure control module, front axle, left, no X 8.11 - 39
CAN reception from module
software incompatibility between control unit
and pressure control module
12/24 volt incompatibility between control
unit and pressure control module
03143 7 7 Pressure control module, front axle, left, high X 8.11 - 40
cycle protection, inlet valve active, pressure
< 4 bar
arithmetic test not successful
wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor A
wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor B
fault, voltage supply, axle load sensor
pressure differential on pressure control
module pair, front axle
Fault messages, pressure control module (1-channel), right on the front axle
Check lamps
code page
03150 2 1 Pressure control module, front axle, right, no ---
fault
03151 8 1 Pressure control module, front axle, right, X 8.11 - 45
T 61-A1 8.10 - 19
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
long instability, wheel sensor A
fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor A
long instability, wheel sensor B
fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor B
pad wear sensor A out of permitted value
range
pad wear sensor B out of permitted value
range
range
8.10 - 20 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
time for inquiry "current pressure" too long
poor ventilation
feedback
03190 8 5 Pressure control module, front axle, right, no X 8.11 - 66
high cycle protection, inlet valve active,
pressure < 4 bar
T 61-A1 8.10 - 21
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
Fault message, pressure control module (2-channel) on the rear axle (left-hand side)
Check lamps
code page
03200 2 1 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, no ---
fault
03201 9 1 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, X 8.11 - 72
03206 9 1 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, long X 8.11 - 75
instability, wheel sensor A
03208 9 1 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, fault X 8.11 - 76
on lifting axle, wheel sensor A
8.10 - 22 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
03216 9 2 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, long X 8.11 - 80
instability, wheel sensor B
03218 9 2 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, fault X 8.11 - 81
on lifting axle, wheel sensor B
03221 9 3 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, pad X 8.11 - 83
wear sensor A out of permitted value range
03222 9 3 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, pad X 8.11 - 84
wear sensor B out of permitted value range
range
03224 9 4 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, time X 8.11 - 85
for inquiry "current pressure" too long
03225 9 4 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, poor X 8.11 - 86
ventilation
T 61-A1 8.10 - 23
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
feedback
03240 9 5 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, no X 8.11 - 97
03243 9 7 Pressure control module, rear axle, left, high X 8.11 - 99
cycle protection, inlet valve active, pressure
< 4 bar
module pair, rear axle
Fault message, pressure control module (2-channel) on the rear axle (right-hand side)
Check lamps
code page
03250 2 1 Pressure control module, rear axle, right, no ---
fault
03251 10 1 Pressure control module, rear axle, right; X 8.11 - 103
03252 10 1 Pressure control module, rear axle, right, X 8.11 - 103
8.10 - 24 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
range
range
range
poor ventilation
T 61-A1 8.10 - 25
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
feedback
03290 10 5 Pressure control module, rear axle, right, no X 8.11 - 128
pressure < 4 bar
8.10 - 26 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
Fault message, pressure control module (2-channel) on the centre axle (left-hand side)
Check lamps
code page
03300 2 1 Pressure control module, centre axle, left, no ---
fault
03301 11 1 Pressure control module, centre axle, left, X 8.11 - 134
T 61-A1 8.10 - 27
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
range
range
range
poor ventilation
8.10 - 28 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
feedback
03340 11 5 Pressure control module, centre axle, left, no X 8.11 - 153
pressure < 4 bar
Fault message, pressure control module (2-channel) on the centre axle (right-hand side)
Check lamps
code page
03350 2 1 Pressure control module, centre axle, right, ---
no fault
03351 12 1 Pressure control module, centre axle, right; X 8.11 - 158
03352 12 1 Pressure control module, centre axle, right, X 8.11 - 158
T 61-A1 8.10 - 29
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
no valid fault definition
range
range
range
poor ventilation
8.10 - 30 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
feedback
no CAN reception from module
pressure < 4 bar
T 61-A1 8.10 - 31
DIAGNOSIS
Check lamps
code page
Fault message for on-board diagnosis (OBD)
Check lamps
SPN Priori- SPN plain text Section/
ty page
03507 --- OBD, no valid fault definition ---
03512 2 OBD, request, red warning lamp during X 8.11 - 184
diagnosis
03513 5 OBD, request, yellow warning lamp during X 8.11 - 184
diagnosis
03515 5 OBD, signal, brake pad wear sensor X 8.11 - 184
03517 2 OBD, voltage too high or too low X 8.11 - 185
03519 5 OBD, wheel speed sensor, fault during last X 8.11 - 185
switch-on cycle
03520 3 OBD, limit gap speed, warning level, X 8.11 - 186
repeated every second
03521 5 OBD, frequent-stop brake active ---
03522 5 OBD, chassis dynamometer mode active X 8.11 - 186
03525 5 OBD, external wheel adjustment X ---
(speedo signal/speed sensor)
8.10 - 32 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
SPN fault code description
The following fault code descriptions document the fault reactions.
The fault codes apply to the following bus and coach models:
− A01
− A03, A13, A33
− A04, A32
− A20, A21, A22, A35
− A23, A24
− A25, A26, A30
− R02, R03
Fault codes for which no models are listed can occur in all the above bus and coach models. If the fault
code only applies to certain bus and coach models, the models are indicated alongside the fault codes
concerned.
SPN --> Suspect Parameter Number (fault location)
− SPN fault code: 03000

(Flashing code: 2 1)
SPN plain text: No fault

Check lamp: ---
Emergency function (function level 1):

The tractor electronic brake system (EBS) has no faults and functions without restrictions.

SPN plain text: Control unit defective; unknown µC interrupt, µC self-test, RAM or ROM test
Check lamp: For buses and coaches A20, A21, A22, A23, A24, A25, A26, A30 and A35:
Check lamp, alarm (H213) and
check lamp, spring actuator, reservoir (H270) light up red
For buses and coaches A01, A03, A04, A13, A32, A33, R02 and R03:
Central STOP warning light (H111) and
check lamp, general brake check (H108) light up red
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory.
Remark:
If the fault re-occurs after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange the EBS electronic control unit
(A402). Furthermore, if these fault messages appear frequently during normal operation, we also
recommend exchanging of the electronic control unit.

All pressure control modules are de-energised. The EBS electronic control unit is energised. Braking is via
the pneumatic back-up circuit. The system has no automatic load-dependent brake (ALB), no anti-lock
braking system (ABS) and no anti-spin regulator (ASR) (brake and engine controller).
T 61-A1 8.11 - 1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Control unit defective; timeout for data exchange µC active - µC passive
Remedy:
Remark:


SPN plain text: Control unit defective; redundancy fault, µC input signal
Remedy:
Remark:
The EBS electronic control unit (A402) has 2 redundant computers and both record the control unit input
signals at the same time. The input signals recorded by each computer are compared with each other. Any
differences detected are registered as faults (redundancy fault, input signal).
If the fault is detected again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange the EBS electronic control
unit. Furthermore, if these fault messages appear frequently during normal operation, we also recommend
exchanging of the electronic control unit.

8.11 - 2 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Control unit defective; testsum data exchange µC active - µC passive
Remedy:
Remark:


SPN plain text: Control unit defective; EEPROM fault: Checksum not correct
Remedy:
Use MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II to register the checksum in the EBS electronic control unit (A402).
Remark:

T 61-A1 8.11 - 3
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Control unit defective; redundancy fault, µC output signal
Remedy:
Remark:
unit (A402). Furthermore, if these fault messages appear frequently during normal operation, we also


SPN plain text: Control unit defective; wheel diameter compensating value not correct
Check lamp, early warning (H214) and
check lamp, tractor ABS (H139) light up yellow
For buses and coaches A01, A03, A04, A13, A32 and A33:
Check lamp, tractor ABS (H139) lights up yellow
For buses and coaches R02 and R03:

tractor/trailer ABS warning light (H107) light up yellow.
Remedy:
The parameters for wheel diameter compensation must be corrected by writing the standard values into the
EEPROM by means of end-of-line (EOL) programming.
Remark:

The brake pressure in the control channel concerned is controlled based on the electrical setpoint (by the
electro-pneumatic brake system - EPB). The vehicle's anti-lock braking system (ABS) is deactivated and
the anti-spin regulator (ASR) functions (brake controller and engine controller) are no longer executed. The
sustained-action brake relay (DBR) output is not activated.
8.11 - 4 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Control unit defective; fault in service brake valve curve

Remedy:
The service brake valve (with integrated brake power sensor B337) has to be re-calibrated. The service
brake valve has to be adjusted using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
Remark:
The EBS electronic control unit (A402) is supplied with a provisional, functional service brake valve curve
data record. Vehicle-specific calibration is required in order to ensure faultless operation. Calibration
corrects the data record for the service brake valve (with integrated brake power sensor).

EBS functions without restrictions in the tractor. If the yellow warning light comes on whilst the vehicle is in
this state, EOL adjustment does not take place.

SPN plain text: Control unit defective; incompatibility in data record version number
Remedy:
The data record must be corrected by writing the standard values into the EEPROM by means of end-of-
line (EOL) programming.
The vehicle-specific data record must be loaded.
Remark:

All EBS components are de-energised. Braking is via the pneumatic back-up circuit. The anti-lock braking
system (ABS), anti-spin regulator (ASR), automatic load-dependent brake (ALB), coupling force control
(KKR) and pad wear sensor (BVS) functions are not operational. The sustained-action brake relay (DBR)
output is not activated.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 5
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Control unit defective; curve in EEPROM not plausible
Remedy:
The curves in the EEPROM data record have to be checked using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
Remark:

All EBS components are de-energised. Braking is via the pneumatic back-up circuit. The anti-lock braking
system (ABS), anti-spin regulator (ASR), automatic load-dependent brake (ALB), coupling force control
(KKR) and pad wear sensor (BVS) functions are not operational. The sustained-action brake relay (DBR)
output is not activated.

SPN plain text: Defective supply voltage (5 volts) for analogue sensors
Remedy:
Carry out a shunt check in the 5-volt line to the brake power sensor (B337), which is built into the service
brake valve, and the automatic load-dependent brake (ALB) sensor for the rear axle.
Remark:
The 5-volt voltage between pin X2/3 (ground, brake power sensor) and pin X2/2 (voltage supply, brake
power sensor) and the EBS electronic control unit (A402) must be in the range 5V (± 0.45V). This voltage
can also be read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit pin
assignment.

The EBS electronic control unit and pressure control module are energised. The signals in the pressure
control module are processed and communication is maintained between the pressure control module and
EBS control unit. The EBS control unit always sends the setpoint "zero" to the pressure control module.
Braking is via the pneumatic back-up circuit. There is no automatic load-dependent brake (ALB) control and
no anti-spin regulator (ASR) control (brake and engine controller).
8.11 - 6 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Defective service brake valve-potentiometer signal
Remedy:
On the service brake valve (with integrated brake power sensor) check the cables and plug connectors
between the EBS electronic control unit (A402) and the brake power sensor (B337) for short-circuits and
line breaks. Measure supply voltage at brake power sensor and power sensor potentiometer resistance.
Desired brake power sensor pressures with connector removed, without actuation:
Pin X2/7 4.2 kΩ = R = 7.5 kΩ (desired brake power sensor pressure 1)
Pin X2/4 4.9 kΩ = R = 2.1 kΩ (desired brake power sensor pressure 2)
Remark:
Permitted potentiometer signal ranges at EBS electronic control unit (A402):
− Brake power sensor signal 1: Between pin X2/3 (ground, brake power sensor) and pin X2/7, the
voltages for the potentiometer 1 signal should be 0.5 – 0.2V and 4.3 + 0.2V.
− Brake power sensor signal 2: Between pin X2/3 (ground, brake power sensor) and pin X2/4, the
voltages for the potentiometer 2 signal should be 4.4 + 0.2V and 0.5 – 0.2V.
Permitted supply voltage range at EBS electronic control unit:

− Between pin X2/2 (5V voltage supply, brake power sensor) and pin X2/3, the measured voltage should
be 5V ± 0.45V.
These voltages can also be read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for component and EBS electronic control unit pin assignment.

The EBS electronic control unit and pressure control module are energised. The signals in the pressure
control module are processed and communication is maintained between the pressure control module and
EBS control unit. The EBS control unit always sends the setpoint "zero" to the pressure control module.
Braking is via the pneumatic back-up circuit. There is no automatic load-dependent brake (ALB) control and
no anti-spin regulator (ASR) control (brake and engine controller).

SPN plain text: Defective axle load, sensor 1
For buses and coaches A04 and A32:
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the cables and plug connectors between the
pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) and the automatic load-dependent brake (ALB) sensor, 3rd axle
(B504) for short-circuits and line breaks.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 7
DIAGNOSIS
In the case of A04, A20, A21, A22, A25, A26, A30, A32, A35, R02 and R03 buses and coaches, check
the cables and plug connectors between the pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) and the automatic
load-dependent brake (ALB) sensor (B336) for short-circuits and line breaks.
Check the compatibility of the end-of-line (EOL) parameters and the connected sensors. Determine the
resistance values at this sensor with the connector removed.
Between pin 2 and pin 3: 2.2 kΩ = R = 8.4 kΩ Pin 1: Voltage supply (5V)
Pin 2: Sensor ground
Between pin 1 and pin 2: 4.0 kΩ = R = 6.0 kΩ Pin 3: Sensor data line
(supply voltage 5V - measured at ALB sensor B336)
A23 and A24 buses and coaches have identical pin assignment and values; in this case, the resistance is
measured at ALB sensor B504.
Remark:
Permitted ALB sensor value ranges, measured at the pressure control module, rear axle Y264;
in the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, measured at pressure control module, 3rd axle Y354:
Between pin 3/3 and pin 3/1, the voltage range should be > 0.1V (bellows pressure low) and < 4.9V
(bellows pressure high). These voltages can be read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
The compatibility of the EOL parameters and the connected ALB sensor must be assured. Refer to the
EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit (A402) pin assignment.

EBS operates using the EOL-programmed value "L = ALB-Fehl" (ALB fault) for brake pressure distribution
when braking with service brake (EPB) and using the ALB value L = 0 in the case of ABS for IRM (modified
individual control) on the front axle.
− SPN fault code: 03023 (currently only used for A23 and A24 buses and coaches)
SPN plain text: Defective axle load, sensor 2

Check lamp: For buses and coaches A23 and A24:
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) and the
automatic load-dependent brake (ALB) sensor, 2nd axle (B503) for short-circuits and line breaks. Check
the compatibility of the EOL parameters and the connected sensors/resistance values at this sensor with
the connector removed.
Between pin 2 and pin 3: 2.2 kΩ = R = 8.4 kΩ Pin 1: Voltage supply (5V)
Pin 2: Sensor ground
Between pin 1 and pin 2: 4.0 kΩ = R = 6.0 kΩ Pin 3: Sensor data line
(supply voltage 5V - measured at ALB sensor B503)
Remark:
Permitted ALB sensor value ranges (measured at pressure control module, 2nd axle Y353):
Between pin 3/3 and pin 3/1, the voltage range should be > 0.1V (bellows pressure low) and < 4.9V
(bellows pressure high).
These voltages can be read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
The compatibility of the EOL parameters and the connected ALB sensor must be assured. Refer to the
EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit (A402) pin assignment.

when braking with service brake (EPB) and using the ALB value L = 0 in the case of ABS for IRM (modified
individual control) on the front axle.
8.11 - 8 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Brake pad wear: Incorrect tendency between the axles
Check lamp: For buses and coaches A20, A21, A22, A23, A24, A25, A26, A30, A35, R02 and R03:
Check lamp, brake pad wear (appears as icon on the display)
Check lamp, brake pad wear (H373) lights up yellow
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Also check all pad wear indicator sensors (sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right
(B332), sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left (B333), sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334), sensor, brake
pad, 2nd axle, left (B335), sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388) and sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left
(B389)) and the all the vehicle's wheel brakes for wear, oily patches and stiffness, etc.
Remark:
Despite complete adjustment, controlling the pad wear cannot reverse the wear trend on an axle.
Emergency function: ---

SPN plain text: Brake pad wear: Incorrect tendency between the wheels of axle 1
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Also check the pad wear indicator sensors on axle 1 (sensor, brake pad, 1st axle,
right (B332), sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left (B333)) and the wheel brakes on axle 1 for wear, oily patches,
stiffness, etc.
Remark:
The wheel wear trend on this axle does not match the average wear trend for the vehicle.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 9
DIAGNOSIS

Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Also check the pad wear indicator sensors on axle 2 (sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle,
right (B334), sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335)) and the wheel brakes on axle 2 for wear, oily
patches, stiffness, etc.
Remark:

Check lamp: For buses and coaches A23, A24, A25, A26 and A30:

Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. In the case of A04, A23, A24, A25, A26, A30 and A32 buses and coaches, also
check the pad wear indicator sensors on axle 3 (sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B338), sensor, brake
pad, 3rd axle, left (B389)) and the wheel brakes on axle 3 for wear, oily patches, stiffness, etc.
Remark:
− SPN fault code: 03028 (not currently used as no pin assignment available.)
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Also check the pad wear indicator sensors on axle 4 and the wheel brakes on axle
4 for wear, oily patches, stiffness, etc.
Remark:
8.11 - 10 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Defective brake pad wear and sustained-action brake relay output stage feedback
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between the pad wear indicator and the sustained-action brake relay
for short-circuit with ground or 24 volts and line break.
Remark:
The output stage of the pad wear indicator or the sustained-action brake relay may be defective.
unit (A402). The feedback test can be deactivated by means of end-of-line (EOL) programming. If the
feedback test is activated, the pad wear indicator and sustained-action brake relay must not be switched by
external systems. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control
unit pin assignment.
EBS functions function without restrictions. The EBS electronic control unit continues to attempt to activate
the sustained-action brake and/or brake wear sensor.

SPN plain text: Defective sustained-action brake relay output stage feedback
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Check the sustained-action brake relay cables and plug connectors for short-circuit
with ground or 24 volts and line break.
Remark:
The output stage of the sustained-action brake relay may be defective. If the fault re-occurs after the fault
memory has been cleared, exchange the EBS electronic control unit (A402). The feedback test can be shut
off by means of end-of-line (EOL) programming. If the feedback test is activated, the sustained-action brake
relay must not be switched by external systems. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the
component and EBS electronic control unit pin assignment.
the sustained-action brake and/or brake wear sensor.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 11
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Defective brake pad wear output stage feedback
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Check the sustained-action brake relay cables and plug connectors for short-circuit
with ground or 24 volts and line break.
Remark:
The output stage of the brake wear indicator may be defective. If the fault re-occurs after the fault memory
has been cleared, exchange the EBS electronic control unit (A402).
The feedback test can be deactivated by means of end-of-line (EOL) programming.
If the feedback test is activated, the sustained-action brake relay must not be switched by external systems.
assignment.

the sustained-action brake and/or brake pad wear sensor.

SPN plain text: Short-circuit at one of the module output stages
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the cables and plug connectors for the EBS
modules - pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262), pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263),
pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) - for short-circuits
with 24 volts.
In the case of other buses and coaches, check the cables and plug connectors for the EBS modules -
pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262), pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263) and
pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) - for short-circuits with 24 volts.
Remark:
A module output stage may be defective.
unit (A402).
The feedback test can be deactivated by means of end-of-line (EOL) programming.
assignment.
8.11 - 12 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS


SPN plain text: CAN data bus, drive train, bus off
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors for the drive train CAN data bus (T-CAN) for short-circuits or line
breaks. The total resistance from the EBS control unit A402 pin X1/1 to A402 pin X1/3 should be 60Ω.
Ensure that the control units connected to the drive train CAN data bus (T-CAN) are fully functional.
Emergency function:
EBS functions with restrictions. The EBS functions which rely on the drive train CAN data bus (T-CAN) are
not executed. The EBS electronic control unit (A402) continues attempting to establish a connection.

SPN plain text: Drive train CAN data bus, receive time exceeded for message EEC1 from EDC
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors of the drive train CAN data bus (T-CAN) for short-circuits or line
breaks. The total resistance from the EBS control unit A402 pin X1/1 to A402 pin X1/3 should be 60Ω.
Ensure that the control units used are fully functioning.
Emergency function (function level 1a):

EBS functions without restriction except for anti-spin regulator (ASR) engine control and/or general CAN
communication and the associated functions.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 13
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: CAN data bus, drive train, receive time exceeded for message ERC1_D from retarder
Check lamp: For buses and coaches R02 and R03:
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors for the drive train CAN data bus (T-CAN) between the EBS
electronic control unit (A402) and the retarder control unit (A144) for short-circuits or line breaks.
The total resistance from the EBS control unit A402 pin X1/1 to A402 pin X1/3 should be 60Ω. The control
unit used should be fully functioning.
The EBS operates without functions which use the ERC1_D-Message. The EBS electronic control unit
continues attempting to establish a connection.

SPN plain text: CAN data bus, drive train, receive time exceeded for message ERC1_E from retarder
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between the drive train CAN data bus (T-CAN) and the
corresponding retarder control unit (A144) for short-circuits or line breaks.
The EBS operates without functions which use the ERC1_E-Message. The EBS electronic control unit

SPN plain text: CAN data bus, drive train, receive time exceeded for message ERC1_EX from vehicle
management computer

ABS warning/fault lamp (H107) light up yellow.
Remedy:
corresponding vehicle management computer control unit (A403) for short-circuits or line breaks.
The EBS operates without functions which use the ERC1_EX-Message. The EBS electronic control unit
EBS functions without restriction except for ASR engine control and/or general CAN communication and
the associated functions.
8.11 - 14 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: CAN databus, drive train, receive time exceeded for message "High Resolution
Vehicle Distance" from tachograph

Remedy:
corresponding tachograph control unit (A408) for short-circuits or line breaks.
The EBS operates without functions which use the ECV-Message. The EBS electronic control unit
EBS functions without restriction except for ASR engine control and/or general CAN communication and
the associated functions.

SPN plain text: CAN databus, drive train, receive time exceeded for message "Supply Pressure" from
ECAM
Remedy:
corresponding ECAM control unit (A409) for short-circuits or line breaks.
The EBS operates without functions which use the ECAM-Message. The EBS electronic control unit

SPN plain text: CAN data bus, drive train, receive time exceeded for message EEC3 from EDC
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between the drive train CAN data bus (T-CAN) and the EDC control
unit (A435) for short-circuits or line breaks.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 15
DIAGNOSIS

The EBS operates without functions which use the EEC3-Message. The EBS electronic control unit

SPN plain text: CAN data bus, drive train, receive time exceeded for message
"CruiseControl/VehicleSpeed" from EDC via vehicle management computer

Remedy:
corresponding EDC control unit (A435) whose signal comes from the vehicle management computer
(A403) for short-circuits or line breaks.
The EBS operates without functions which use the ECC-Message. The EBS electronic control unit

SPN plain text: CAN data bus, drive train, receive time exceeded for message "vehicle weight
measurement" from ECAS

Remedy:
corresponding ECAS control unit (A143) for short-circuits or line breaks.
The EBS operates without functions which use the EVW (Electronic Vehicle Weight) Message. The EBS
electronic control unit continues attempting to establish a connection.

SPN plain text: CAN data bus, drive train, values for vehicle weight in the message "Vehicle Weight"
from ECAS out of range

8.11 - 16 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remedy:
Check that the system which provides the information about the vehicle weight functions correctly. The total
resistance from the EBS control unit A402 pin X1/1 to A402 pin X1/3 should be 60Ω.

The EBS operates without functions which use the EVW-Message. The EBS electronic control unit

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, break, short-circuit, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263) and ABS
sensor, 1st axle, left (B119) for line breaks or short-circuits
(B119: Brown line - Y263: Pin 4/2 and B119: Black line - Y263: Pin 4/1).
Remark:
The sensor resistance should be between 950Ω and 1930Ω (measure at the pressure control module from
pin 4/2 to pin 4/1). This fault is indicated if a voltage < 1V or > 4V is measured at ABS sensor, 1st axle, left.
Line breaks are indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp.
After the fault is rectified, the check lamp goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is measured at all ABS
sensors (memory function).
Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit (A402) pin
assignment.

electro-pneumatic brake system - EPB). In the case of the anti-lock braking system (ABS), the wheel with
the defective ABS sensor (1st axle, left) is treated as if it were running unlocked on the road with high
coefficient of friction. The brake pressure is adjusted based on the IRM (modified individual control)
conditions that apply to the axle/pressure control channel. The anti-spin regulator (ASR) functions (brake
and engine control) are deactivated. The sustained-action brake output is not activated.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 17
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, wheel sensor A: Deceleration excessive
Remedy:
sensor, 1st axle, left (B119) for line breaks or short-circuits (B119: Brown line - Y263: Pin 4/2 and B119:
Black line - Y263: Pin 4/1).
Remark:
pin 4/2 to pin 4/1). This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS sensor, 1st axle, left fails abruptly and
v > 30 km/h and if there is a short-circuit between two ABS sensor lines and ABS sensor, 1st axle, left has
fallen out of its fixture.
After the fault is rectified, the yellow check lamp goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is measured at
all ABS sensors (memory function).
Refer to EBS electr. wiring diagram for component and EBS electronic control unit (A402) pin assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, wheel sensor A: Starting-off fault
Remedy:
Slide ABS sensor, 1st axle, left (B119) into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
There is excessive clearance between ABS sensor, 1st axle, left and the rotor.
This fault also occurs if v > 18 km/h is measured at n-1 wheels and no signal is received from a wheel for
longer than 20 seconds or v > 40 km/h is measured at an ABS sensor and no signal is measured by the
other ABS sensors for longer than 20 seconds.
The wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. There are differences in the
tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated (0.8 - 1.2) must not be
exceeded. After the fault is rectified, the yellow check lamp goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is
measured at all ABS sensors (memory function). Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the
component and EBS electronic control unit (A402) pin assignment.
8.11 - 18 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, wheel sensor A: Excessive clearance
Remedy:
Check the clearance between ABS sensor, 1st axle, left (B119) and the rotor.
Slide ABS sensor, 1st axle, left into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
This malfunction occurs if the limit gap speed v > 10 km/h.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, perpetual control, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
sensor, 1st axle, left (B119) for line breaks or short-circuits (B119: Brown line - Y263: Pin 4/2 and B119:
Black line - Y263: Pin 4/1). The sensor resistance should be between 950Ω and 1930Ω (measure at the
pressure control module from pin 4/2 to pin 4/1).
Also check - the rotor for dirt including particles containing metal,
- the clearance between ABS sensor, 1st axle, left and the rotor,
- the rotor for damage (missing teeth),
- the rotor for damage (wobble < 0.3 mm) and
- the rotor for the correct number of teeth and pitch faults.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 19
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) intervention is active at a wheel for a prolonged period (more than 3
minutes) but the wheel cannot be stabilised (perpetual control). Controlled wheels are monitored during
ABS control. The wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. There are
differences in the tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated (0.8 - 1.2)
must not be exceeded.
assignment.

the defective ABS sensor, 1st axle, left (B119) is treated as if it were running unlocked on the road with
high coefficient of friction. The brake pressure is adjusted based on the IRM (modified individual control)

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, long instability, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors to ABS sensor, 1st axle, left (B119) for line breaks, short-circuits
and chafing (B119 - brown and black lines).
Also check - the brake cylinders for residual pressures,
- the rotor for dirt including particles containing metal,
Remark:
This malfunction occurs if a wheel controlled by the anti-lock braking system (ABS) is not stabilised after
20 seconds. The wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. There are
must not be exceeded. After the fault is rectified, the yellow check lamp goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20
km/h) is measured at all ABS sensors (memory function). Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the

8.11 - 20 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Check - the rotor for dirt including particles containing metal,
Remark:
The wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. There are differences in tyre
diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated (0.8 - 1.2) must not be exceeded.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Check that both wheels on the lifting axle are either in the air or on the ground.
Remark:
This malfunction occurs if one of the two wheels on the lifting axle is turning at v < 15 km/h and the other
wheel on the lifting axle is turning at the vehicle speed and the vehicle speed > 30km/h.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 21
DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, break, short-circuit, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between pressure control module, front axle, left and ABS sensor,
left for line breaks or short-circuits.
Remark:
The sensor resistance should be between 950Ω and 1930Ω.
This fault is indicated if a voltage < 1V or > 4V is measured at the ABS sensor, left. Line breaks are
indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp.

the defective ABS sensor (left) is treated as if it were running unlocked on the road with high coefficient of
friction. The brake pressure is adjusted based on the IRM (modified individual control) conditions that apply
to the axle/pressure control channel. The anti-spin regulator (ASR) functions (brake and engine control) are
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, wheel sensor B: Deceleration excessive
Remedy:
left for line breaks or short-circuits.
Remark:
This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS sensor, left fails abruptly and v > 30km/h and if there is a short-
circuit between two ABS sensor lines and ABS sensor, left has fallen out of its fixture. After the fault is
rectified, the yellow check lamp goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is measured at all ABS sensors
(memory function). Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control
unit (A402) pin assignment.
8.11 - 22 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, wheel sensor B: Starting-off fault
Remedy:
Slide ABS sensor, left into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
There is excessive clearance between ABS sensor, left and the rotor.
The wheel speeds and the limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. There are differences in
the tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded.
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, wheel sensor B: Excessive clearance
Remedy:
Check the clearance between ABS sensor, left and the rotor.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 23
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
This malfunction occurs if the gap speed v > 10 km/h.
tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded.
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, perpetual control, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
left for line breaks or short-circuits. The sensor resistance should be between 950Ω and 1930Ω.
- the clearance between ABS sensor, left and the rotor,
Remark:
The wheels are controlled or monitored in the event of anti-lock braking system (ABS) intervention. The
wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. There are differences in the tyre
diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded.
assignment.

8.11 - 24 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, long instability, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors to the ABS sensor, left for line breaks, short-circuits and chafing.
Remark:
differences in tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. Limit values indicated must not be exceeded.
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Remark:
tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded. After
the fault is rectified, the yellow check lamp goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is measured at all
ABS sensors (memory function). Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS
electronic control unit (A402) pin assignment.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 25
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Remark:
wheel on the lifting axle is turning at the vehicle speed and the vehicle speed > 30 km/h.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, fault, voltage supply, pad wear sensor
Remedy:
Check
− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left (B333) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage supply),
− the cables and plug connectors starting from pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263) to sensor,
brake pad, 1st axle, left
from Y263 pin 2/1 to B333 pin 1 (ground)
from Y263 pin 2/3 to B333 pin 3 (sensor signal)
from Y263 pin 2/4 to B333 pin 4 (5V voltage supply)
− sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left itself and the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground).
8.11 - 26 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263) - output between pin 2/4
(voltage supply) and pin 2/1 (ground) should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is
released). Refer to EBS electr. wiring diagram for component/EBS elect. control unit (A402) pin
assignment.

The pad wear monitor has failed. All other EBS functions are available.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, pad wear sensor A out of permitted value
range
Remedy:
Check
− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left (B333) for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V
voltage supply),
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3: signal from
sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left (B333) to pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263 pin 2/3)) and,
from Y263 pin 2/3 to Y263 pin 2/1, the voltage should be < 4.9V (approx. 2 seconds - wear limit) and
> 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad)
− the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground).
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263) - output between pin 2/4
(voltage supply) and pin 2/1 (ground) should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when brake is released).
Voltages can be read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. End-of-line (EOL) parameters must be
compatible with the pad wear sensors used. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component
and EBS electronic control unit (A402) pin assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, pad wear sensor B out of permitted value
range
Remedy:
Check
− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage supply),
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3: signal from sensor, brake
pad to pressure control module, front axle, left) and
T 61-A1 8.11 - 27
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module, front axle, left - output between voltage supply
and ground should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is released).
These voltages are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. The connected brake pad sensor must be
end-of-line (EOL) compatible. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, pressure sensor out of permitted value range
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Also check the functioning of pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263). The
pressure should be modulated by means of diagnosis (with MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II) and a comparison
made with external pressure gauge.
Check the supply lines to pressure control module, front axle, left.
Electrical: Y263 pin 3/2: 24V voltage supply starting from EBS electronic control unit
(A402 pin X3/11) and Y263 pin 3/1: Ground connection starting from EBS electronic control
unit (A402 pin X3/2)
Pneumatic: Connection 1 for energy inflow (reservoir)
Exchange the defective pressure control module, front axle, left.
Remark:
There is an internal pressure control module malfunction or the pressure control plausibility test is not
successful. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure control
module, front axle, left (Y263). If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange
pressure control module, front axle, left. These pressures are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II (not
in event of fault).
The pressure sensor measuring range is 0 to 13 bar. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the
The pressure control module, front axle, left concerned is de-energised. The axle concerned is braked via
the pneumatic back-up circuit, even if a pressure control module is still intact. There is no automatic load-
dependent brake (ALB) control and no anti-lock braking system (ABS) control. The anti-spin regulator
(ASR) functions (brake and engine control) are deactivated.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, time for inquiry "current pressure" too long
8.11 - 28 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Check the pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263) for functioning.
Exchange the defective pressure control module, front axle, left.
Check that the silencer for the pressure control module, front axle, left has sufficient throughput.
Remark:
successful.
If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure control module,
front axle, left (Y263).
If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange pressure control module, front axle,
left.
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, poor ventilation
Remedy:
Check the vent holes (connection 3 for ventilation) of the pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263).
Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, front axle, left. Exchange the defective pressure
control module, front axle, left.
Remark:
If ventilation of the pressure control module, front axle left is hindered whilst the brake is being released,
this leads to incorrect measuring results.
This can be caused by a blocked or hardened outlet silencer element.
Insufficient gaps in relation to surrounding objects can also trigger this fault message.
A defective outlet valve or a defective pressure sensor in pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263)
can trigger this fault message. There is an internal pressure control module malfunction or the pressure
control plausibility test is not successful. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared,
exchange the pressure control module, front axle, left.
left. These pressures are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
assignment.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 29
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, excessive pressure during pulse test
Remedy:
The following pneumatic connections between the individual components are based on the EBS brake
function diagram.
For buses and coaches A01, A03, A13, A33, R02 and R03:
Check the pneumatic connections for pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263), i.e.
the pneumatic lines from
− pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263/G67.302 connection 2) to diaphragm cylinder, left - type 20
(G10.175),
− pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263/G67.302 connection 4) to service brake valve
(B337/G7.304 connection 21) and to pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262/G67.302
connection 4) and
− the supply lines for pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263/G67.302 connection 1)

(G10.303),
connection 4) and
For buses and coaches A25, A26 and A30:

(G10.303),
connection 4) and

(G10.175),
connection 4) and
8.11 - 30 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
For buses and coaches A20, A21, A22 and A35:

(G10.303),
connection 4) and
Connection 1 (supply line) is responsible for the energy inflow.

Connection 2 is responsible for the energy outflow and
connection 4 is for the back-up circuit (solenoid valve, back-up circuit).
Also check the functioning of the pressure control module. Exchange the defective pressure control
module, front axle, left if it is not functioning.
Check the test pulse duration in the end-of-line (EOL) data memory using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
Remark:
This malfunction occurs if the automatic pulse test after the ignition switch is activated does not cover the
set pressure range.
This happens when - the pneumatic lines are crushed or blocked or
- the pulse test length is not adapted to the volume of the brake cylinders used or
- the pressure control module, front axle, left is not functional.
These values are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. If the fault is detected again after the fault
memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure control module, front axle, left.
assignment. The pneumatic connections appear in the function description and on the function diagram.
Emergency function:
EBS functions without restrictions.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, residual pressure after braking
Remedy:
function diagram.
Check the pressure in back-up circuit connection 4 (pressure control module - service brake valve).
T 61-A1 8.11 - 31
DIAGNOSIS
(G10.175),
connection 4) and

(G10.303),
connection 4) and

(G10.303),
connection 4) and

(G10.175),
connection 4) and

(G10.303),
connection 4) and

8.11 - 32 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Check the pressure gradient of the service brake valve with integrated brake power sensor (B337) in back-
up circuit connection 4 (to solenoid valve, back-up circuit).
Remark:
The fault occurs when - the pneumatic lines are blocked or dirty or
- the pressure control module, front axle, left is not functional or
- the service brake valve with integrated brake power sensor is not functional.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, fault, pressure sensor without braking
Remedy:
function diagram.
(G10.175),
connection 4) and

(G10.303),
connection 4) and
T 61-A1 8.11 - 33
DIAGNOSIS

(G10.303),
connection 4) and

(G10.175),
connection 4) and

(G10.303),
connection 4) and

Remark:
- the pressure control module, front axle, left is not functional or

8.11 - 34 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, wheel sensor IC defective
Remedy:
Remark:
There is an internal pressure control module malfunction. If the fault is detected again after the fault
memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263).
left.
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, defective back-up valve, feedback
Remedy:
Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263). Exchange the pressure
control module, front axle, left if it is not functioning.
Remark:
There is a fault on the signal path of the back-up circuit solenoid valve (back-up valve) in the pressure
control module, front axle, left. If the fault is detected again after the fault memory has been cleared,
left.
assignment.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 35
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, defective inlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
left.
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, defective inlet and back-up valve, feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
left. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit (A402)
pin assignment.
8.11 - 36 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, defective outlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
left.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, defective outlet and back-up valve, feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
exchange the pressure control module, front axle, left. If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal
operation, also exchange pressure control module, front axle, left.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 37
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, defective outlet and inlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
left. Refer to EBS electr. wiring diagram for component and EBS elect. control unit (A402) pin assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, defective outlet and inlet and back-up valve,
feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
left. Refer to EBS electr. wiring diagram for component and EBS elect. control unit (A402) pin assignment.
8.11 - 38 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, no CAN reception from module
Remedy:
The connections from the control unit, EBS (A402) to the pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263)
− pin X3/2 (control unit, EBS) - pin 3/1 (ground, pressure control module, front axle, left);
− pin X3/11 (control unit, EBS) - pin 3/2 (24V voltage supply, pressure control module, front axle, left);
− pin X3/8 (control unit, EBS) - pin 3/3 (CAN High for pressure control module, front axle, left) and
− pin X3/5 (control unit, EBS) - pin 3/4 (CAN Low for pressure control module, front axle, left)
must be checked (check for chafing especially).
Check plug connectors at EBS electronic control unit and at pressure control module, front axle, left.
Measure the battery voltage from A402 pin X3/11 (voltage supply Y263) to A402 pin X3/2 (ground Y263).
Next determine the total resistance of 64Ω from A402 pin X3/8 (CAN High Y263) to A402 pin X3/5 (CAN
Low Y263).
Also check the ground connections of all connected pressure control modules:
− For buses and coaches A23 and A24:
Pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263), pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262),
pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354)
− For the other buses and coaches:
pressure control module, rear axle (Y264)
Remark: Brake CAN
Baud rate: 250 kBaud
Peak voltage values: Recessive CAN Low 2.5 V
CAN High 2.5 V
Dominant CAN Low 1.5 V
CAN High 3.5 V
Head length: 11 bits
Message length: 8 bytes
assignment.
In the case of buses and coaches A20, A21, A22, A23, A24, A25, A26, A30, A35, R02 and R03, also
check the ground signal (resistance < 1Ω) from A402 pin X1/12 (ground, pressure control module input) to
X618 (distributor, terminal board X102, line 31000) and the battery voltage (24V) of the EBS control unit
(A402) from A402 pin X1/8 (voltage supply, terminal 30) to X618 (distributor, terminal board X102, line
31000).
In the case of buses and coaches A01, A03, A04, A13, A32 and A33, also check the ground signal
(resistance < 1Ω) from A402 pin X1/12 (ground, pressure control module input) to X615 (distributor,
terminal board X613, line 31000) and the battery voltage (24V) of the EBS control unit (A402) from A402
pin X1/8 (voltage supply, terminal 30) to X615 (distributor, terminal board X613, line 31000).

T 61-A1 8.11 - 39
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, software incompatibility between control unit
Remedy:
Exchange the EBS electronic control unit (A402) or the pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263) for
one with compatible software version.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, 12/24 volt incompatibility between control
Remedy:
Exchange the EBS electronic control unit (A402) or the pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263) for
one with compatible voltage version.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, high cycle protection, inlet valve active,
pressure < 4 bar
8.11 - 40 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the functioning of pressure control module, front
axle, left (Y263). Exchange the defective pressure control module, front axle, left if it is not functioning.
Also check free passage in the pneumatic supply lines to pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263),
front axle, right (Y262), 2nd axle (Y353) and 3rd axle (Y354).
(Check external monitoring of the check lamps for early warning (H214) and tractor ABS (H139) (pressure
sensor for supply pressure - installed in pressure control module)).
In the case of other buses and coaches, check the functioning of pressure control module, front axle, left
(Y263). Exchange the defective pressure control module, front axle, left if it is not functioning.
front axle, right (Y262) and rear axle (Y264).
(Check external monitoring of the check lamps for early warning (H214)/tractor ABS (H139)/central STOP
warning light (H111), tractor/trailer ABS (H107), pressure sensor for supply pressure - installed in pressure
control module).
Remark:
The status "high cycle protection" is achieved when the pressure sensor in pressure control module, front
axle, left does not reach the required desired pressure. After a time the inlet valve is then activated
cyclically. This prevents overloading of the inlet valve solenoid. There is therefore no fault message initially.
This malfunction occurs if the desired value is not reached for some time at low brake cylinder pressure.
At supply pressure < 4 bar, a fault message is triggered after checking of the pressure sensor for the
supply pressure.
Check the reservoir pressure in circuits 1 and 2.
The current values are read out from the pressure control module pressure sensor using MAN-cats I or
MAN-cats II.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, arithmetic test not successful
Remedy:
Remark:
If the fault is detected again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure control
module, front axle, left (Y263).
T 61-A1 8.11 - 41
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Check the tyre sizes on the front and rear axle.
Press the ASR shut-off button for a distance of at least 10 km at a speed of more than 25 km/h. The ASR
info. check lamp flashes.
Clear the fault memory of the EBS electronic control unit (A402) and then reset the control unit.
Remark:
The ABS sensor, left (B119) forwards this information to the EBS control unit. This malfunction occurs
when the calculated wheel speed on the axles differs by more than 9%. This is indicated by the check
lamps for early warning (yellow) (H214)/tractor ABS (H139)/central STOP warning light (H111),
tractor/trailer ABS (H107) and the fault is stored in the EBS control unit.
If compensation causes the difference in wheel speeds to fall below < 9%, faultless operation is possible
until the next deactivation. However, the fault remains in the fault memory.
The compensated wheel diameter is output until the maximum permitted difference which is stored in the
end of line (EOL) is reached (e.g. 25%).
Diameter compensation is operational when the road speed is between 25 km/h and 100 km/h, the brake is
not active, there is no anti-lock braking system (ABS) and anti-spin regulator (ASR) intervention and the
vehicle speed is almost constant.
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
8.11 - 42 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
The ABS sensor, left forwards this information to the EBS control unit. This malfunction occurs when the
calculated wheel speed on the axles differs by more than 9%. This is indicated by the check lamps for early
warning (yellow) (H214)/tractor ABS (H139)/central STOP warning light (H111), tractor/trailer ABS (H107)
and the fault is stored in the EBS control unit. If compensation causes the difference in wheel speeds to fall
below < 9%, faultless operation is possible until the next deactivation. However, the fault remains in the
fault memory. The compensated wheel diameter is output until the maximum permitted difference which is
stored in the end of line (EOL) is reached (e.g. 25%).

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, fault, voltage supply, axle load sensor

Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between the pressure control module and the ALB sensor for short-
circuits and line breaks.
Remark:
Check the supply voltage.
Permitted supply voltage range at pressure control module: 5V ± 0.45V.
assignment.

when braking with service brake (electro-pneumatic brake EPB) and using the automatic load-dependent
brake (ALB) value L = 0 in the case of the anti-lock braking system (ABS) for IRM (modified individual
control) on the front axle.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 43
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, pressure differential on pressure control

Remedy:
Check the functioning of the pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263). Exchange the pressure control
Check free passage in the pneumatic supply lines (connection 1) to pressure control module, front axle, left
(Y263) and front axle, right (Y262).
Remark:
This malfunction occurs when there is a pressure differential > 0.8 bar for longer than 3 seconds in one of
the pressure control modules on an axle.
The current values are read out from the pressure sensors for pressure control module, front axle, left using
MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.

8.11 - 44 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between pressure control module, front axle, right and ABS sensor,
right for line breaks or short-circuits.
Remark:
The sensor resistance should be between 950Ω and 1930Ω. This fault is indicated if a voltage < 1V or > 4V
is measured at ABS sensor, right.
Line breaks are indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp. After the fault is rectified, the check lamp
goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is measured at all ABS sensors (memory function).
assignment.
the defective ABS sensor (right) is treated as if it were running unlocked on the road with high coefficient of
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, wheel sensor A: Deceleration excessive
Remedy:
Remark:
This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS sensor, right fails abruptly and v > 30 km/h and if there is a short-
circuit between two ABS sensor lines and ABS sensor, right has fallen out of its fixture.
assignment.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 45
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, wheel sensor A: Starting-off fault
Remedy:
Slide ABS sensor, right into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
There is excessive clearance between ABS sensor, right and the rotor.
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, wheel sensor A: Excessive clearance
Remedy:
Check the clearance between ABS sensor, right and the rotor.
8.11 - 46 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, perpetual control, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
- the clearance between ABS sensor, right and the rotor,
Remark:
Controlled wheels are monitored during anti-lock braking system (ABS) control. The wheel speed and limit
gap are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. There are differences in the tyre diameter due to mixed-
profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 47
DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, long instability, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors to the ABS sensor, right for line breaks, short-circuits and chafing.
Remark:
differences in the tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Remark:
tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded. After
the fault is rectified, the yellow check lamp goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is measured at all
8.11 - 48 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Remark:

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262) and ABS
sensor, 1st axle, right (B120) for line breaks or short-circuits
Remark:
pin 1/2 to pin 1/1). This fault is indicated if a voltage < 1V or > 4V is measured at the ABS sensor, 1st axle,
right. Line breaks are indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 49
DIAGNOSIS

the defective ABS sensor (1st axle, right) is treated as if it were running unlocked on the road with high

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, wheel sensor B: Deceleration excessive
Remedy:
sensor, 1st axle, right (B120) for line breaks or short-circuits (B120: Brown line - Y262: Pin 1/2 and B120:
Black line - Y262: Pin 1/1).
Remark:
pin 1/2 to pin 1/1). This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS sensor, 1st axle, right fails abruptly and v
> 30 km/h and if there is a short-circuit between two ABS sensor lines and ABS sensor, 1st axle, right has
fallen out of its fixture.
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, wheel sensor B: Starting-off fault
Remedy:
Slide ABS sensor, 1st axle, right (B120) into position by hand (do not strike!).
8.11 - 50 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
There is excessive clearance between ABS sensor, 1st axle, right and the rotor.
the tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated (0.8 - 1.2) must not be
exceeded.
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, wheel sensor B: Excessive clearance

Remedy:
Check the clearance between ABS sensor, 1st axle, right (B120) and the rotor.
Slide ABS sensor, 1st axle, right into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
exceeded.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 51
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, perpetual control, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
sensor, 1st axle, right (B120) for line breaks or short-circuits (B120: Brown line - Y262: Pin 1/2 and B120:
Black line - Y262: Pin 1/1). The sensor resistance should be between 950Ω and 1930Ω (measure at the
pressure control module from pin 1/2 to pin 1/1).
- the clearance between ABS sensor, 1st axle, right and the rotor,
Remark:
Anti-lock brake system (ABS) intervention is active at a wheel for a prolonged period (more than 3 minutes)
but the wheel cannot be stabilised (perpetual control). The wheels are controlled or monitored in the event
of ABS intervention. The wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. There
are differences in the tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated (0.8 - 1.2)

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, long instability, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors to the ABS sensor, 1st axle, right (B120) for line breaks, short-
circuits and chafing (B120: Brown and black lines).
8.11 - 52 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
Remark:
measured at all ABS sensors (memory function).
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 53
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Remark:

the defective ABS sensor (1st axle, right) (B120) is treated as if it were running unlocked on the road with

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, fault, voltage supply, pad wear sensor
Remedy:
Check
− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right (B332) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage
supply),
− the cables and plug connectors starting from pressure control module, front axle, right (Y263) to sensor,
brake pad, 1st axle, right
− sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right itself and the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground).
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262) - output between pin 2/4
released). Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit
(A402) pin assignment.

8.11 - 54 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, pad wear sensor A out of permitted value
range
Remedy:
Check
− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right (B332) for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V
voltage supply),
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3: signal from
sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right (B332) to pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262 pin 2/3))
and, from Y262 pin 2/3 to Y262 pin 2/1, the voltage should be < 4.9V (approx. 2 seconds - wear limit)
and > 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad) and
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262) - output between pin 2/4
released). These voltages are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. The connected sensor, brake pad,
1st axle, right must be end-of-line (EOL) compatible.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, pad wear sensor B out of permitted value
range
Remedy:
Check
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3: Signal from sensor, brake
pad to pressure control module, front axle, right and
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module, front axle, right - output between voltage supply
and ground should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is released). Voltages can be read
out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. End-of-line (EOL) parameters must be compatible with the pad wear
sensors used.
assignment.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 55
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, pressure sensor out of permitted value
range
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262).
The pressure should be modulated by means of diagnosis (with MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II) and a
comparison made with external pressure gauge.
Check the supply lines to pressure control module, front axle, right.
(A402 pin X3/12) and
Y262 pin 3/1: Ground connection starting from EBS electronic control unit (A402 pin X3/3)
Exchange the defective pressure control module, front axle, right.
Remark:
module, front axle, right (Y262). If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange
pressure control module, front axle, right.
These pressures are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II (not in event of fault). The pressure sensor
measuring range is 0 to 13 bar. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS
The pressure control module, front axle, right concerned is de-energised. The axle concerned is braked via

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, time for inquiry "current pressure" too long
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Check the pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262) for functioning.
Exchange the defective pressure control module, front axle, right.
Check that the silencer for the pressure control module, front axle, right has sufficient throughput.
8.11 - 56 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
successful.
front axle, right (Y262).
right.
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, poor ventilation

Remedy:
Check the vent holes (connection 3 for ventilation) of the pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262).
Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, front axle, right. Exchange the defective
pressure control module, front axle, right.
Remark:
If ventilation of the pressure control module, front axle right is hindered whilst the brake is being released,
this leads to incorrect measuring results.
A defective outlet valve or a defective pressure sensor in pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262)
can trigger this fault message. There is an internal pressure control module malfunction or the pressure
control plausibility test is not successful. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared,
exchange the pressure control module, front axle, right.
right. These pressures are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 57
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, excessive pressure during pulse test
Remedy:
function diagram.
Check the pneumatic connections for pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262), i.e.
− pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262/G67.302 connection 2) to diaphragm cylinder, right -
type 20 (G10.174),
− pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262/G67.302 connection 4) to service brake valve
(B337/G7.304 connection 21) and to pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263/G67.302
connection 4) and
− the supply lines for pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262/G67.302 connection 1)

type 16 (G10.302),
connection 4) and

type 16 (G10.302),
connection 4) and

type 20 (G10.174),
connection 4) and
8.11 - 58 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

type 16 (G10.302),
connection 4) and
module, front axle, right if it is not functioning.
Remark:
set pressure range.
- the pressure control module, front axle, right is not functional.
memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure control module, front axle, right.
Emergency function:

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, residual pressure after braking
Remedy:
function diagram.
Check the pneumatic connections for pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262), i.e. the pneumatic
lines from
type 20 (G10.174),
connection 4) and
T 61-A1 8.11 - 59
DIAGNOSIS

type 16 (G10.302),
connection 4) and

type 16 (G10.302),
connection 4) and

type 20 (G10.174),
connection 4) and

type 16 (G10.302),
connection 4) and

Remark:
- the pressure control module, front axle, right is not functional or
8.11 - 60 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, fault, pressure sensor without braking
Remedy:
function diagram.
type 20 (G10.174),
connection 4) and

type 16 (G10.302),
connection 4) and

type 16 (G10.302),
connection 4) and

type 20 (G10.174),
connection 4) and
T 61-A1 8.11 - 61
DIAGNOSIS

type 16 (G10.302),
connection 4) and

Remark:
- the pressure control module, front axle, right is not functional or


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, wheel sensor IC defective
Remedy:
Remark:
There is an internal pressure control module malfunction. If the fault is detected again after the fault
memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262).
right.
8.11 - 62 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, defective back-up valve, feedback
Remedy:
Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262). Exchange the pressure
control module, front axle, right if it is not functioning.
Remark:
control module, front axle, right. If the fault is detected again after the fault memory has been cleared,
right.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, defective inlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
exchange the pressure control module, front axle, right. If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal
operation, also exchange pressure control module, front axle, right.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 63
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, defective inlet and back-up valve, feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
right

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, defective outlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
8.11 - 64 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, defective outlet and back-up valve,
feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
right.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, defective outlet and inlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
T 61-A1 8.11 - 65
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, defective outlet and inlet and back-up valve,
feedback
Remedy:
Remark:
right. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit (A402)
pin assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, no CAN reception from module
Remedy:
The connections from the EBS control unit (A402) to the pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262)
− pin X3/3 (control unit, EBS) - pin 3/1 (ground, pressure control module, front axle, right);
− pin X3/12 (control unit, EBS) - pin 3/2 (24V voltage supply, pressure control module, front axle, right);
− pin X3/9 (control unit, EBS) - pin 3/3 (CAN High for pressure control module, front axle, right) and
− pin X3/6 (control unit, EBS) - pin 3/4 (CAN Low for pressure control module, front axle, right)
Check plug connectors at EBS electronic control unit and at pressure control module, front axle, right.
Measure the battery voltage from A402 pin X3/12 (voltage supply Y262) to A402 pin X3/3 (ground Y262).
Next determine total resistance 64Ω from A402 pin X3/9 (CAN High Y262) to A402 pin X3/6 (CAN Low
Y262).
8.11 - 66 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

Remark: Brake CAN

CAN High 2.5 V
CAN High 3.5 V
31000).


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, software incompatibility between control

Remedy:
Exchange the EBS electronic control unit (A402) or the pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262) for
one with compatible software version.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 67
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, 12/24 volt incompatibility between control
Remedy:
Exchange the EBS electronic control unit (A402) or the pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262) for
one with compatible voltage version.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, high cycle protection, inlet valve active,
pressure < 4 bar
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the functioning of pressure control module, front
axle, right (Y262). Exchange the defective pressure control module, front axle, right if it is not functioning.
(Check external monitoring of the check lamps for early warning (H214) and tractor ABS (H139) (pressure
sensor for supply pressure - installed in pressure control module)).
In the case of other buses and coaches, check the functioning of pressure control module, front axle,
right (Y262). Exchange the defective pressure control module, front axle, right if it is not functioning.
(Check external monitoring of the check lamps for early warning (H214), tractor ABS (H139), central STOP
warning light (H111) and tractor/trailer ABS (H107) (pressure sensor for supply pressure - installed in
pressure control module)).
Remark:
The status "high cycle protection" is achieved when the pressure sensor in pressure control module, front
axle, right does not reach the required desired pressure. After a time the inlet valve is then activated
This malfunction occurs if the desired value is not reached for some time at low brake cylinder pressure. At
supply pressure < 4 bar, a fault message is triggered after checking of the pressure sensor for the supply
pressure.
Check the reservoir pressure in circuits 1 and 2. The current values are read out from the pressure control
module pressure sensors using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
8.11 - 68 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, arithmetic test not successful
Remedy:
Remark:
module, front axle, right (Y262).
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Remark:
The ABS sensor, right forwards this information to the EBS control unit. This malfunction occurs when the
and the fault is stored in the EBS control unit.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 69
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Check the tyre sizes on the front and rear axle. Press the ASR shut-off button for a distance of at least 10 km
at a speed of more than 25 km/h. The ASR info. check lamp flashes. Clear the fault memory of the EBS
electronic control unit (A402) and then reset the control unit.
Remark:
The ABS sensor, 1st axle, right (B120) forwards this information to the EBS control unit. This malfunction
occurs when the calculated wheel speed on the axles differs by more than 9%. This is indicated by the
check lamps for early warning (yellow) (H214)/tractor ABS (H139)/central STOP warning light (H111),
tractor/trailer ABS (H107) and the fault is stored in the EBS control unit. If compensation causes the
difference in wheel speeds to fall below < 9%, faultless operation is possible until the next deactivation.
However, the fault remains in the fault memory. The compensated wheel diameter is output until the
maximum permitted difference which is stored in the end of line (EOL) is reached (e.g. 25%).
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, fault, voltage supply, axle load sensor
8.11 - 70 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between the pressure control module and the ALB sensor for short-
circuits and line breaks.
Remark:
Permitted supply voltage range at pressure control module, rear axle: 5V ± 0.45V.
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, right, pressure differential on pressure control

Remedy:
Check the functioning of the pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262). Exchange the defective
pressure control module, front axle, right if it is not functioning.
Check free passage in the pneumatic supply lines (connection 1) to pressure control module, front axle,
right (Y262) and front axle, left (Y263).
Remark:
The current values are read out from the pressure sensors for pressure control module, front axle, right
using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 71
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the cables and plug connectors between pressure
control module, 3rd axle (Y354) and ABS sensor, 3rd axle, left (B223) for line breaks or short-circuits
In the case of other buses and coaches, check the cables and plug connectors between pressure control
module, rear axle (Y264) and ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121) for line breaks or short-circuits
Remark:
pin 1/2 to pin 1/1). This fault is indicated if a voltage < 1V or > 4V is measured at ABS sensor, left. Line
breaks are indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp. After the fault is rectified, the check lamp goes
out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is measured at all ABS sensors (memory function).
friction. The brake pressure is adjusted based on the IR (individual control) conditions that apply to the
axle/pressure control channel. The anti-spin regulator (ASR) functions (brake and engine control) are

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, wheel sensor A: Deceleration excessive
Remedy:
8.11 - 72 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
pin 1/2 to pin 1/1). This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS sensor, left fails abruptly and v > 30 km/h and
if there is a short-circuit between two ABS sensor lines and ABS sensor, left has fallen out of its fixture.
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, wheel sensor A: Starting-off fault

Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, slide ABS sensor, 3rd axle, left (B223) into position by
hand (do not strike!).
In the case of other buses and coaches, slide ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121) into position by hand (do
not strike!).
Remark:
exceeded.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 73
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, wheel sensor A: Excessive clearance
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the clearance between ABS sensor, 3rd axle, left
(B223) and the rotor. Slide the ABS sensor into position by hand (do not strike!).
In the case of other buses and coaches, check the clearance between ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121)
and the rotor. Slide the ABS sensor into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, perpetual control, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
The sensor resistance should be in the range between 950Ω and 1930Ω (measure at the pressure control
module from pin 1/2 to pin 1/1).
8.11 - 74 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
but the wheel cannot be stabilised (perpetual control). Controlled wheels are monitored during ABS control.
exceeded.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, long instability, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the cables and plug connectors to ABS sensor,
3rd axle, left (B223) for line breaks, short-circuits and chafing (B223: Brown and black lines).
In the case of other buses and coaches, check the cables and plug connectors to ABS sensor, 2nd axle,
left (B121) for line breaks, short-circuits and chafing (B121: Brown and black lines).
Remark:
assignment.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 75
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Remark:
the defective ABS sensor, left – (in the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches: ABS sensor, 3rd axle,
left (B223); in the case of other buses and coaches: ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121)) – is treated as if it
were running unlocked on the road with high coefficient of friction. The brake pressure is adjusted based on
the IR (individual control) conditions that apply to the axle/pressure control channel. The anti-spin regulator
(ASR) functions (brake and engine control) are deactivated. The sustained-action brake output is not
activated.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Remark:
the defective ABS sensor, left – (in the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches: ABS sensor, 3rd axle,
left (B223); in the case of other buses and coaches: ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121)) – is treated as if it
were running unlocked on the road with high coefficient of friction. The brake pressure is adjusted based on
the IR (individual control) conditions that apply to the axle/pressure control channel. The anti-spin regulator
(ASR) functions (brake and engine control) are deactivated. The sustained-action brake output is not
activated.
8.11 - 76 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
control module, 3rd axle and ABS sensor, left for line breaks or short-circuits.
module, rear axle and ABS sensor, left for line breaks or short-circuits.
Remark:
indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp.
assignment.
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, wheel sensor B: Deceleration excessive
Remedy:
T 61-A1 8.11 - 77
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS sensor, left fails abruptly and v > 30km/h and if there is a short-
circuit between two ABS sensor lines and ABS sensor, left has fallen out of its fixture.
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, wheel sensor B: Starting-off fault

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.

8.11 - 78 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, wheel sensor B: Excessive clearance
Remedy:
Check the clearance between ABS sensor, left and the rotor. Slide the ABS sensor into position by hand
(do not strike!).
Remark:
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, perpetual control, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
The sensor resistance should be in the range between 950Ω and 1930Ω.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 79
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. There are differences in the tyre
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, long instability, wheel sensor B

Remedy:

Remark:
exceeded.
assignment.

8.11 - 80 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Remark:
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Remark:
wheel on the lifting axle is turning at the vehicle speed and the vehicle speed v > 30 km/h.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 81
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, fault, voltage supply, pad wear sensor
Remedy:
For buses and coaches A04, A25, A26, A30 and A32, check:
− the 5V line via V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, left (X1887) to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) and
sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4 in each case: 5V voltage supply),
− the cables and plug connections starting from pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) to sensor,
brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) and sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) from Y264 pin 2/1 via
ground crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, left (X1888) to B335 pin 1 and B389 pin 1 (ground in each case),
from Y264 pin 2/3 to B335 pin 3 (sensor signal),
from Y264 pin 2/2 to B389 pin 3 (sensor signal) and
from Y264 pin 2/4 via V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, left (X1887) to B335 pin 4 and B389 pin 4 (5V
voltage supply in each case)
− sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left and sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left itself and the ground connection
for both sensors (pin 1: Ground).
For buses and coaches A23 and A24, check:

− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage
supply),
− the cables and plug connectors starting from pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) to sensor, brake
pad, 3rd axle, left
− sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left itself and the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground).
For buses and coaches A01, A03, A13, A20, A21, A22, A33, A35, R02 and R03, check:
− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage
supply),
− the cables and plug connectors starting from pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) to sensor, brake
pad, 2nd axle, left
− sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left itself and the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground).
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module - output between pin 2/4 (voltage supply) and
pin 2/1 (ground) should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is released). Refer to the EBS
electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit (A402) pin assignment.

8.11 - 82 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, pad wear sensor A out of permitted value
range
Remedy:
− the 5V line via V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, left (X1887) to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) for
short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage supply),
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3:
Signal from sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) to pressure control module, rear axle (Y264 pin
2/3)) and, from Y264 pin 2/3 to Y264 pin 2/1, the voltage should be < 4.9V (approx. 2 seconds - wear
limit) and > 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad) (sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left B335);
− the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground) via ground crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, left (X1888).

− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4 in each case:
5V voltage supply),
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3:
Signal from sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) to pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354 pin 2/3))
and, from Y354 pin 2/3 to Y354 pin 2/1, the voltage should be < 4.9V (approx. 2 seconds - wear limit)
and > 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad) (sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left B389) and
− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4 in each case:
5V voltage supply),
Signal from sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) to pressure control module, rear axle (Y264 pin
limit) and > 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad) (sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left B335) and
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module - output between pin 2/4 (voltage supply) and pin
2/1 (ground) should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is released). Voltages can be read
out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
The connected brake pad sensor must be end-of-line (EOL) compatible.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 83
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, pad wear sensor B out of permitted value
range
Check lamp: For buses and coaches A25, A26 and A30:
− the 5V line via V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, left (X1887) to sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) for
short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage supply),
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3:
Signal from sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) to pressure control module, rear axle (Y264 pin
limit) and > 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad) (sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left B389) and
− the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground) via ground crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, left (X1888).
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module, rear axle - output between pin 2/4 (voltage
supply) and pin 2/1 (ground) should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is released).
Voltages can be read out using MAN-cats I.
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, pressure sensor out of permitted value range
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) in the
case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches and the functioning of the pressure control module, rear axle
(Y264) in the case of the other buses and coaches.
Check the supply lines to the pressure control module.
Electrical: Pin 6/2: 24V voltage supply starting from the EBS electronic control unit (A402 pin X4/13)
and
Pin 6/1: Ground connection starting from EBS electronic control unit (A402 pin X4/4)
Exchange the defective pressure control module.
8.11 - 84 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
successful. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange pressure control
module, 3rd axle (Y354) in the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches and pressure control module,
rear axle (Y264) in the case of the other buses and coaches. If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal
operation, also exchange the pressure control module.
These pressures are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II (not in event of fault).
The pressure sensor measuring range is 0 to 13 bar.
assignment.

The pressure control module concerned is de-energised. The axle concerned is braked via the pneumatic
back-up circuit, even if a pressure control module is still intact. There is no automatic load-dependent brake
(ALB) control and no anti-lock braking system (ABS) control. The anti-spin regulator (ASR) functions (brake
and engine control) are deactivated.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, time for inquiry "current pressure" too long
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the functioning of pressure control module,
3rd axle (Y354).
In the case of other buses and coaches, check the functioning of pressure control module, rear axle
(Y264).
Check that the silencer for the pressure control module has sufficient throughput.
Remark:
successful.
module.
If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange the pressure control module.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 85
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, poor ventilation
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the vent holes (connection 3 for ventilation) for the
pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354).
In the case of the other buses and coaches, check the vent holes (connection 3 for ventilation) for the
pressure control module, rear axle (Y264).
module.
Remark:
If ventilation of the pressure control module is hindered whilst the brake is being released, this leads to
incorrect measuring results.
A defective outlet valve or a defective pressure sensor in pressure control module can trigger this fault
message. There is an internal pressure control module malfunction or the pressure control plausibility test
is not successful. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure
control module.
If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange the pressure control module. These
pressures are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, excessive pressure during pulse test
Remedy:
function diagram.
8.11 - 86 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
For buses and coaches A01, A03, A13, and A33:

Check the pneumatic connections for pressure control module, rear axle (Y264), i.e.
− pressure control module, rear axle (Y264/G67.303 connection 21) to combination cylinder, left - type
24/24 (G11.303 connection 11),
− pressure control module, rear axle (Y264/G67.303 connection 4) to service brake valve (B337/G7.304
connection 22) and
− the supply lines for pressure control module, rear axle (Y264/G67.303 connection 1)

Check the pneumatic connections for pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354), i.e.
− pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354/G67.303 connection 21) to combination cylinder - type 20/24
(G11.313 connection 11),
− pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354/G67.303 connection 4) to pressure control module, 2nd axle
(Y353/G67.303 connection 4) and service brake valve (B337/G7.304 connection 22) and
− the supply lines for pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354/G67.303 connection 1)

− pressure control module, rear axle (Y264/G67.303 connection 21) to combination cylinder - type 20/24
− pressure control module, rear axle (Y264/G67.303 connection 21) to double check valve (G21.11
connection 11), from double check valve (G21.11 connection 2) to relay valve (G14.65 connection 4)
and from relay valve (G14.65 connection 2) to combination cylinder - type 10/16 (G11.314 connection
11),
connection 22) and

20/24 (G11.311 connection 11),
11),
connection 22) and

connection 22) and
For buses and coaches R02:

20/24 (G11.311 connection 11),
connection 22) and
T 61-A1 8.11 - 87
DIAGNOSIS

20/24 (G11.311 connection 11),
11),
connection 22) and

Also check the functioning of the pressure control module. Exchange the defective pressure control module
if it is not functioning.
Remark:
set pressure range.
- the pressure control module is not functional.
memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure control module.
Emergency function:

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, residual pressure after braking
Remedy:
function diagram.
8.11 - 88 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

Check the pressure in connection 4 (pressure control module, rear axle (Y264/G67.303 connection 4) -
service brake valve (B337/G7.304 connection 22)) of the back-up circuit.
24/24 (G11.303 connection 11),
connection 22) and
Check the pressure in connection 4 (pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354/G67.303 connection 4) -
service brake valve (B337/G7.304 connection 22) and pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353/G67.303
connection 4)) of the back-up circuit.
11),
connection 22) and
20/24 (G11.311 connection 11),
11),
connection 22) and
connection 22) and
T 61-A1 8.11 - 89
DIAGNOSIS

20/24 (G11.311 connection 11),
connection 22) and

20/24 (G11.311 connection 11),
11),
connection 22) and

Remark:
- the pressure control module is not functional or


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, fault, pressure sensor without braking
Remedy:
function diagram.
8.11 - 90 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

24/24 (G11.303 connection 11),
connection 22) and
11),
connection 22) and
20/24 (G11.311 connection 11),
11),
connection 22) and
connection 22) and
T 61-A1 8.11 - 91
DIAGNOSIS

20/24 (G11.311 connection 11),
connection 22) and

20/24 (G11.311 connection 11),
11),
connection 22) and

Remark:


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, wheel sensor IC defective
Remedy:
8.11 - 92 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
There is an internal pressure control module malfunction.
If the fault is detected again in A23 and A24 buses and coaches after the fault memory has been cleared,
exchange the pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354).
If the fault is detected again in the other buses and coaches after the fault memory has been cleared,
exchange the pressure control module, rear axle (Y264).
If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange the pressure control module. Refer to
the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit (A402) pin
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, defective back-up valve, feedback
Remedy:
3rd axle (Y354).
(Y264).
Exchange the defective pressure control module if it is not functioning.
Remark:
control module. If the fault is detected again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange the
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 93
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, defective inlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the functioning of pressure control module, 3rd
axle (Y354).
(Y264).
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, defective inlet and back-up valve, feedback
Remedy:
axle (Y354).
(Y264).
8.11 - 94 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, defective outlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
axle (Y354).
In the case of other buses and coaches, check functioning of pressure control module, rear axle (Y264).
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, defective outlet and back-up valve, feedback
T 61-A1 8.11 - 95
DIAGNOSIS
Remedy:
3rd axle (Y354).
(Y264).
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, defective outlet and inlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
3rd axle (Y354).
(Y264).
Remark:
assignment.

8.11 - 96 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, defective outlet and inlet and back-up valve,
feedback
Remedy:
3rd axle (Y354).
Remark:


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, no CAN reception from module
Remedy:
The connections from the control unit, EBS (A402) to the pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) in the
case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches/to the pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) in the case of
the other buses and coaches
− pin X4/4 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/1 (ground, pressure control module);
− pin X4/13 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/2 (24V voltage supply, pressure control module);
− pin X4/10 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/3 (CAN High for pressure control module) and
− pin X4/7 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/4 (CAN Low for pressure control module)
must be checked (check for chafing especially). Check the plug connectors at the EBS electronic control
unit and at the pressure control module. Measure the battery voltage (24V) from A402 pin X4/13 (voltage
supply Y264/Y354) to A402 pin X4/4 (ground Y264/Y354) . Next determine the total resistance of 64Ω from
A402 pin X4/10 (CAN High Y264/Y 354) to A402 pin X4/7 (CAN Low Y264/Y354).
T 61-A1 8.11 - 97
DIAGNOSIS
Remark: Brake CAN

CAN High 2.5 V
CAN High 3.5 V
check ground signal (resistance < 1Ω) from A402 pin X1/12 (ground, pressure control module input) to
X618 (distributor, terminal board X102, line 31000) and battery voltage (24V) of the EBS control unit (A402)
from A402 pin X1/8 (voltage supply, terminal 30) to X618 (distrib., term. board X102, line 31000).
In the case of buses and coaches A01, A03, A04, A13, A32 and A33 , also check the ground signal


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, software incompatibility between control unit
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, exchange the EBS electronic control unit (A402) or the
pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) for one with compatible software version.
In the case of the other buses and coaches, exchange the EBS electronic control unit (A402) or the
pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) for one with compatible software version.

8.11 - 98 T 61-A1
DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, 12/24 volt incompatibility between control unit
Remedy:
pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) for one with compatible voltage version.
pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) for one with compatible voltage version.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, high cycle protection, inlet valve active,
pressure < 4 bar
Remedy:
The status "high cycle protection" is achieved when the pressure sensor in the pressure control module
does not reach the required desired pressure. After a time the inlet valve is then activated cyclically. This
prevents overloading of the inlet valve solenoid. There is therefore no fault message initially.
3rd axle (Y354). Exchange the defective pressure control module, 3rd axle if it is not functioning.
(Check external monitoring of the check lamps for alarm (H213) and spring actuator reservoir (H270)
(pressure sensor for supply pressure - installed in pressure control module, 3rd axle)).
(Y264). Exchange the defective pressure control module, rear axle if it is not functioning.
(Check external monitoring of the check lamps for alarm (H213)/central STOP warning light (H111) and
spring actuator reservoir (H270)/general brake check (H108) (pressure sensor for supply pressure -
installed in pressure control module, rear axle)).
Remark:
This malfunction occurs if the desired value is not reached for some time at low brake cylinder pressure. At
supply pressure < 4 bar, a fault message is triggered after checking of the pressure sensor for the supply
pressure. Check the reservoir pressure in circuits 1 and 2.
MAN-cats II.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 99
DIAGNOSIS


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, arithmetic test not successful
Remedy:
Remark:
If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange pressure control module,
3rd axle (Y354) in the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches and pressure control module, rear axle

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Remark:
This information is forwarded to the EBS control unit by ABS sensor, 3rd axle, left (B223) in the case of
A23 and A24 buses and coaches and by ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121) in the case of the other
buses and coaches. This malfunction occurs when the calculated wheel speed on the axles differs by
more than 9%. This is indicated by check lamps for early warning (yellow) (H214)/tractor ABS
(H139)/central STOP warning light (H111), tractor/trailer ABS (H107) and fault is stored in EBS control unit.
8.11 - 100 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Check the tyre sizes on the front and rear axle. Press the ASR shut-off button for a distance of at least 10 km
at a speed of more than 25 km/h. The ASR info. check lamp flashes. Clear the fault memory of the EBS
electronic control unit (A402) and then reset the control unit.
Remark:
The ABS sensor, left forwards this information to the EBS control unit. This malfunction occurs when the

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, fault, voltage supply, axle load sensor
T 61-A1 8.11 - 101

DIAGNOSIS
Remedy:
control module, 3rd axle (Y354) and ALB sensor, 3rd axle (B504) for short-circuits and line breaks and
in the case of the other buses and coaches, check the cables and plug connectors between pressure
control module, rear axle (Y264) and ALB sensor, rear axle (B336) for short-circuits and line breaks
− between pin 3/4 (pressure control module) and pin 1 (voltage supply, ALB sensor),
− between pin 3/1 (pressure control module) and pin 2 (ground, ALB sensor),
− between pin 3/3 (pressure control module) and pin 3 (signal line, ALB sensor)
Remark:
Permitted supply voltage range at pressure control module:
The voltage measured at the pressure control module between pin 3/4 and Pin 3/1 should be 5V ± 0.45V.
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, left, pressure differential on pressure control
Remedy:
Check the functioning of pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) in the case of A23 and A24 buses and
coaches and the functioning of pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) in the case of the other buses
and coaches. Exchange the defective pressure control module if it is not functioning.
Check free passage in the pneumatic supply lines (connection 1) to pressure control module, rear axle
(Y264) or pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354).
Remark:
The current values are read out from the pressure control module pressure sensors using MAN-cats I or
MAN-cats II.

8.11 - 102 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right; interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
control module, 3rd axle and ABS sensor, right for line breaks or short-circuits.
module, rear axle and ABS sensor, right for line breaks or short-circuits.
Remark:
is measured at ABS sensor, right. Line breaks are indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, wheel sensor A: Deceleration excessive

Remedy:
T 61-A1 8.11 - 103

DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS sensor, right fails abruptly and v > 30 km/h and if there is a short-
circuit between two ABS sensor lines and ABS sensor, right has fallen out of its fixture.
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, wheel sensor A: Starting-off fault

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.

8.11 - 104 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, wheel sensor A: Excessive clearance
Remedy:
Check the clearance between ABS sensor, right and the rotor. Slide the ABS sensor into position by hand
(do not strike!).
Remark:
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, perpetual control, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
The sensor resistance should be in the range between 950Ω and 1930Ω.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 105

DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
of ABS intervention. The wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. There
are differences in the tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not
be exceeded.
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, long instability, wheel sensor A

Remedy:

Remark:
exceeded.

8.11 - 106 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Remark:
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor A
Remedy:
Remark:
T 61-A1 8.11 - 107

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
control module, 3rd axle (Y354) and ABS sensor, 3rd axle, right (B224) for line breaks or short-circuits
module, rear axle (Y264) and ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122) for line breaks or short-circuits
Remark:
pin 5/2 to pin 5/1). This fault is indicated if a voltage < 1V or > 4V is measured at ABS sensor, right. Line
breaks are indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp. After the fault is rectified, the check lamp goes
out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is measured at all ABS sensors (memory function).

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, wheel sensor B: Deceleration excessive
Remedy:
8.11 - 108 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
pin 5/2 to pin 5/1). This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS sensor, right fails abruptly and v > 30 km/h
and if there is a short-circuit between two ABS sensor lines and ABS sensor, right has fallen out of its fixture.
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, wheel sensor B: Starting-off fault

Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, slide ABS sensor, 3rd axle, right (B224) into position by
hand (do not strike!).
In the case of other buses and coaches, slide ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122) into position by hand
(do not strike!).
Remark:
exceeded.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 109

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, wheel sensor B: Excessive clearance
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the clearance between ABS sensor, 3rd axle, right
(B224) and the rotor. Slide the ABS sensor into position by hand (do not strike!).
In the case of other buses and coaches, check the clearance between ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122)
and the rotor. Slide the ABS sensor into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, perpetual control, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
The sensor resistance should be in the range between 950Ω and 1930Ω (measure at the pressure control
module from pin 5/2 to pin 5/1).
8.11 - 110 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
but the wheel cannot be stabilised (perpetual control). Controlled wheels are monitored during anti-lock
braking system (ABS) control. The wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats
II. There are differences in the tyre diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated
(0.8 - 1.2) must not be exceeded.
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, long instability, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the cables and plug connectors to ABS sensor,
3rd axle, right (B224) for line breaks, short-circuits and chafing (B224: Brown and black lines).
In the case of other buses and coaches, check the cables and plug connectors to ABS sensor, 2nd axle,
right (B122) for line breaks, short-circuits and chafing (B122: Brown and black lines).
Remark:
assignment.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 111

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Remark:
the defective ABS sensor, right – (in the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches: ABS sensor, 3rd axle,
right (B224); in the case of other buses and coaches: ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122)) – is treated as
if it were running unlocked on the road with high coefficient of friction. The brake pressure is adjusted
based on the IR (individual control) conditions that apply to the axle/pressure control channel. The anti-spin
regulator (ASR) functions (brake and engine control) are deactivated. The sustained-action brake output is
not activated.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Remark:
the defective ABS sensor, right – (in the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches: ABS sensor, 3rd axle,
right (B224); in the case of other buses and coaches: ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122)) – is treated as
if it were running unlocked on the road with high coefficient of friction. The brake pressure is adjusted
based on the IR (individual control) conditions that apply to the axle/pressure control channel. The ASR
functions (brake and engine control) are deactivated. The sustained-action brake output is not activated.
8.11 - 112 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, fault, voltage supply, pad wear sensor
Remedy:
− the 5V line via V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, right (X1889) to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334)
and sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4 in each case: 5V voltage
supply),
− the cables and plug connections starting from pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) to sensor,
brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334) and sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388) from Y264 pin 7/1 via
ground crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, right (X1890) to B334 pin 1 and B388 pin 1 (ground in each case),
from Y264 pin 7/3 to B334 pin 3 (sensor signal),
from Y264 pin 7/4 via V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, right (X1889) to B334 pin 4 and B388 pin 4 (5V
voltage supply in each case)
− sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right and sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right itself and the ground
connection for both sensors (pin 1: Ground).

− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage
supply),
− the cables and plug connectors starting from pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) to sensor, brake
pad, 3rd axle, right
− sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right itself and the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground).
− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage
supply),
− the cables and plug connectors starting from pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) to sensor, brake
pad, 2nd axle, right
− sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right itself and the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground).
Remark:
7/1 (ground) should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is released). Refer to the EBS
electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit (A402) pin assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 113

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, pad wear sensor A out of permitted value
range
Remedy:
− the 5V line via V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, right (X1889) to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334)
for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage supply),
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334) for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3:
Signal from sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334) to pressure control module, rear axle (Y264 pin
limit) and > 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad) (sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right B334);
− the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground) via ground crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, right (X1890).

− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage
supply),
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388) for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3:
Signal from sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388) to pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354 pin
limit) and > 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad) (sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right B388) and
supply),
Signal from sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334) to pressure control module, rear axle (Y264 pin
limit) and > 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad) (sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right B334) and
Remark:
7/1 (ground) should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is released). Voltages can be read
out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
assignment.

8.11 - 114 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, pad wear sensor B out of permitted value
range
Check lamp: For buses and coaches A25, A26 and A30:
Remedy:
− the 5V line via V+ crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, right (X1889) to sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388)
for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage supply),
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388) for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3:
Signal from sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388) to pressure control module, rear axle (Y264 pin
limit) and > 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad) (sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right B388) and
− the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground) via ground crimp, brake pad 2/3 axle, right (X1890).
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module, rear axle - output between pin 7/4 (voltage
supply) and pin 7/1 (ground) should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is released).
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, pressure sensor out of permitted value
range
Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) in the
case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches and the functioning of the pressure control module, rear axle
Electrical: Pin 6/2: 24V voltage supply starting from the EBS electronic control unit (A402 pin X4/13)
and
Pin 6/1: Ground connection starting from EBS electronic control unit (A402 pin X4/4)
T 61-A1 8.11 - 115

DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
successful. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange pressure control
module, 3rd axle (Y354) in the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches and pressure control module,
rear axle (Y264) in the case of the other buses and coaches. If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal
operation, also exchange the pressure control module.
These pressures are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II (not in event of fault). The pressure sensor
measuring range is 0 to 13 bar. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, time for inquiry "current pressure" too long
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check functioning of pressure control module, 3rd axle
(Y354).
Check that the silencer for the pressure control module has sufficient throughput.
Remark:
successful. If the fault is detected again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure
control module. If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange the pressure control
module. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, poor ventilation
8.11 - 116 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
Remedy:
In the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches, check the vent holes (connection 3 for ventilation) for the
pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354).
In the case of the other buses and coaches, check the vent holes (connection 3 for ventilation) for the
pressure control module, rear axle (Y264).
Also check functioning of the pressure control module. Exchange the defective pressure control module.
Remark:
If ventilation of the pressure control module is hindered whilst the brake is being released, this leads to
incorrect measuring results.
A defective outlet valve or a defective pressure sensor in pressure control module can trigger this fault
message. There is an internal pressure control module malfunction or the pressure control plausibility test
is not successful. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure
control module.
If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange the pressure control module. These
pressures are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, excessive pressure during pulse test
Remedy:
function diagram.

− pressure control module, rear axle (Y264/G67.303 connection 22) to combination cylinder, right - type
24/24 (G11.302 connection 11),
− In addition, for A01 buses and coaches only:
pressure control module, rear axle (Y264/G67.303 connection 22) to NO contact, 0.6 - 0.9 bar (G55.201),
connection 22) and
T 61-A1 8.11 - 117

DIAGNOSIS


11),
connection 22) and

20/24 (G11.312 connection 11),
11),
connection 22) and

connection 22) and

20/24 (G11.312 connection 11),
connection 22) and

20/24 (G11.312 connection 11),
11),
8.11 - 118 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
connection 22) and

Remark:
set pressure range.
- the pressure control module is not functional.
memory has been cleared, exchange the pressure control module.
Emergency function:

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, residual pressure after braking
Remedy:
function diagram.

24/24 (G11.302 connection 11),
− In addition, for A01 buses and coaches only:
connection 22) and
T 61-A1 8.11 - 119

DIAGNOSIS


11),
connection 22) and

20/24 (G11.312 connection 11),
11),
connection 22) and

connection 22) and

20/24 (G11.312 connection 11),
connection 22) and
8.11 - 120 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

20/24 (G11.312 connection 11),
11),
connection 22) and

Remark:


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, fault, pressure sensor without braking
Remedy:
function diagram.

24/24 (G11.302 connection 11); In addition, for A01 buses and coaches only:
connection 22) and
T 61-A1 8.11 - 121

DIAGNOSIS


11),
connection 22) and

20/24 (G11.312 connection 11),
11),
connection 22) and

connection 22) and

20/24 (G11.312 connection 11),
connection 22) and
8.11 - 122 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

20/24 (G11.312 connection 11),
11),
connection 22) and

Remark:

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, wheel sensor IC defective
Remedy:
Remark:
There is an internal pressure control module malfunction.
If the fault is detected again in A23 and A24 buses and coaches after the fault memory has been cleared,
exchange the pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354).
If the fault is detected again in the other buses and coaches after the fault memory has been cleared,
exchange the pressure control module, rear axle (Y264).
If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange the pressure control module. Refer to
EBS electrical wiring diagram for component and EBS electronic control unit (A402) pin assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 123

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, defective back-up valve, feedback
Remedy:
(Y354).
Remark:
pressure control module. If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange the
pressure control module. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic
control unit (A402) pin assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, defective inlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
(Y354).
Remark:
8.11 - 124 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, defective inlet and back-up valve, feedback
Remedy:
(Y354).
Remark:


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, defective outlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
axle (Y354).
(Y264).
T 61-A1 8.11 - 125

DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, defective outlet and back-up valve, feedback
Remedy:
axle (Y354).
(Y264).
Remark:
assignment.

8.11 - 126 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, defective outlet and inlet valve, feedback
Remedy:
axle (Y354).
(Y264).
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, defective outlet and inlet and back-up valve,
feedback
Remedy:
axle (Y354).
In the case of other buses and coaches, check the functioning of pressure control module, rear axle (Y264).
T 61-A1 8.11 - 127

DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, no CAN reception from module
Remedy:
The connections from the control unit EBS (A402) to the pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) in the
case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches/to the pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) in the case of
the other buses and coaches
− pin X4/4 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/1 (ground, pressure control module);
− pin X4/13 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/2 (24V voltage supply, pressure control module);
− pin X4/10 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/3 (CAN High for pressure control module) and
− pin X4/7 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/4 (CAN Low for pressure control module)
Check the plug connectors at the EBS electronic control unit and at the pressure control module.
Measure the battery voltage (24V) from A402 pin X4/13 (voltage supply Y264/Y354) to A402 pin X4/4
(ground Y264/Y354). Next determine the total resistance of 64Ω from A402 pin X4/10 (CAN High Y264/
Y 354) to A402 pin X4/7 (CAN Low Y264/Y354).
Remark: Brake CAN

CAN High 2.5 V
CAN High 3.5 V
8.11 - 128 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
31000).


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, software incompatibility between control
Remedy:
pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) for one with compatible software version.
pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) for one with compatible software version.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, 12/24 volt incompatibility between control
T 61-A1 8.11 - 129

DIAGNOSIS
Remedy:
pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) for one with compatible voltage version.
pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) for one with compatible voltage version.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, high cycle protection, inlet valve active,
pressure < 4 bar
Remedy:
The status "high cycle protection" is achieved when the pressure sensor in the pressure control module
does not reach the required desired pressure. After a time the inlet valve is then activated cyclically. This
prevents overloading of the inlet valve solenoid. There is therefore no fault message initially.
axle (Y354). Exchange the defective pressure control module, 3rd axle if it is not functioning.
(pressure sensor for supply pressure - installed in pressure control module, 3rd axle)).
(Y264). Exchange the defective pressure control module, rear axle if it is not functioning.
(Check external monitoring of the check lamps for alarm (H213)/central STOP warning light (H111) and
spring actuator reservoir (H270)/general brake check (H108) (pressure sensor for supply pressure -
installed in pressure control module, rear axle)).
Remark:
supply pressure.
MAN-cats II.

8.11 - 130 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, arithmetic test not successful
Remedy:
Remark:
If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange pressure control module, 3rd
axle (Y354) in the case of A23 and A24 buses and coaches and pressure control module, rear axle

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Remark:
T 61-A1 8.11 - 131

DIAGNOSIS


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor B
Remedy:
Remark:
This information is forwarded to the EBS control unit by ABS sensor, 3rd axle, right (B224) in the case of
A23 and A24 buses and coaches and by ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122) in the case of the other
buses and coaches. This malfunction occurs when the calculated wheel speed on the axles differs by
more than 9%. This is indicated by the check lamps for early warning (yellow) (H214)/tractor ABS
(H139)/central STOP warning light (H111), tractor/trailer ABS (H107) and the fault is stored in the EBS
control unit.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, fault, voltage supply, axle load sensor
8.11 - 132 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
Remedy:
control module, 3rd axle (Y354) and ALB sensor, 3rd axle (B504) for short-circuits and line breaks and
in the case of the other buses and coaches, check the cables and plug connectors between pressure
control module, rear axle (Y264) and ALB sensor, rear axle (B336) for short-circuits and line breaks
− between pin 3/4 (pressure control module) and pin 1 (voltage supply, ALB sensor),
− between pin 3/1 (pressure control module) and pin 2 (ground, ALB sensor),
− between pin 3/3 (pressure control module) and pin 3 (signal line, ALB sensor)
Remark:
Permitted supply voltage range at pressure control module:
The voltage measured at the pressure control module between pin 3/4 and Pin 3/1 should be 5V ± 0.45V.
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, rear axle, right, pressure differential on pressure control
Remedy:
Check the functioning of pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354) in the case of A23 and A24 buses and
coaches and the functioning of pressure control module, rear axle (Y264) in the case of the other buses
and coaches. Exchange the defective pressure control module if it is not functioning.
Check free passage in the pneumatic supply lines (connection 1) to pressure control module, 3rd axle
(Y354) or pressure control module, rear axle (Y264).
Remark:
The current values are read out from the pressure control module pressure sensors using MAN-cats I or
MAN-cats II.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 133

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) and ABS sensor,
2nd axle, left (B121) for line breaks or short-circuits
Remark:
The sensor resistance should be between 950Ω and 1930Ω (measure from Y353 pin 1/2 to Y353 pin 1/1).
This fault is indicated if a voltage < 1V or > 4V is measured at ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left. Line breaks are
indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp for tractor ABS (H139). After the fault is rectified, the check
lamp for tractor ABS goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is measured at all ABS sensors (memory
function). Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit

the defective ABS sensor (2nd axle, left) is treated as if it were running unlocked on the road with high
coefficient of friction. The brake pressure is adjusted based on the IR (individual control) conditions that
apply to the axle/pressure control channel. The anti-spin regulator (ASR) functions (brake and engine
control) are deactivated. The sustained-action brake output is not activated.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, wheel sensor A: Deceleration excessive

Remedy:
Remark:
This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left fails abruptly and v > 30 km/h and if there is
a short-circuit between two ABS sensor lines and ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left has fallen out of its fixture.
After the fault is rectified, the yellow check lamp for tractor ABS (H139) goes out if a sufficient signal (v
> 20 km/h) is measured at all ABS sensors (memory function).

8.11 - 134 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, wheel sensor A: Starting-off fault

Remedy:
Slide ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121) into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
There is excessive clearance between ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left and the rotor.
The wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I. There are differences in the tyre diameter
due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated (0.8 - 1.2) must not be exceeded.
After the fault is rectified, the yellow check lamp for tractor ABS (H139) goes out if a sufficient signal (v
> 20 km/h) is measured at all ABS sensors (memory function).
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, wheel sensor A: Excessive clearance

Remedy:
Check the clearance between ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121) and the rotor.
Slide ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
After the fault is rectified, the yellow check lamp for tractor ABS (H139) goes out if a sufficient signal
(v > 20 km/h) is measured at all ABS sensors (memory function).

T 61-A1 8.11 - 135

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, perpetual control, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
The sensor resistance should be in the range between 950Ω and 1930Ω (measure from Y353 pin 1/2 to
Y353 pin 1/1).
- the clearance between ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left and the rotor,
Remark:
but the wheel cannot be stabilised (perpetual control). Controlled wheels are monitored during ABS control.
assignment.

the defective ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121) is treated as if it were running unlocked on the road with
high coefficient of friction. The brake pressure is adjusted based on the IR (individual control) conditions
that apply to the axle/pressure control channel. The anti-spin regulator (ASR) functions (brake and engine

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, long instability, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors to ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121) for line breaks, short-circuits
8.11 - 136 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
20 seconds. The wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I. There are differences in the tyre
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 137

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Remark:

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between pressure control module, 2nd axle and ABS sensor, left for
line breaks or short-circuits.
Remark:
indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp for tractor ABS (H139). After the fault is rectified, the check
lamp for tractor ABS goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is measured at all ABS sensors (memory
function). Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit

8.11 - 138 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, wheel sensor B: Deceleration excessive

Remedy:
line breaks or short-circuits.
Remark:
This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS sensor, left fails abruptly and v > 30 km/h and if there is a short-
circuit between two ABS sensor lines and ABS sensor, left has fallen out of its fixture.
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, wheel sensor B: Starting-off fault

Remedy:
Remark:
The wheel speeds and the limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I. There are differences in the tyre

T 61-A1 8.11 - 139

DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, wheel sensor B: Excessive clearance

Remedy:
Check the clearance between ABS sensor, left and the rotor.
Slide the ABS sensor into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded. After the fault is
rectified, the yellow check lamp for tractor ABS (H139) goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, perpetual control, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
line breaks or short-circuits. The sensor resistance should be between 950Ω and 1930Ω.
Remark:
wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I. There are differences in the tyre diameter due to
mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded. After the fault is rectified,
the yellow check lamp for tractor ABS (H139) goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is measured at all

friction.
8.11 - 140 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
The brake pressure is adjusted based on the IR (individual control) conditions that apply to the
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, long instability, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
Remark:
diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded. After the
fault is rectified, the yellow check lamp for tractor ABS (H139) goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
Remark:
due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded. After the fault is
rectified, the yellow check lamp for tractor ABS (H139) goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is
T 61-A1 8.11 - 141

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
Remark:


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, fault, voltage supply, pad wear sensor

Remedy:
Check
− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) for short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V voltage
supply),
− the cables and plug connectors starting from pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) to sensor, brake
pad, 2nd axle, left (B335)
− sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left itself and the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground).
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) - output between pin 2/4 (voltage
supply) and pin 2/1 (ground) - should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is released).
assignment.

8.11 - 142 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, pad wear sensor A out of permitted value
range

Remedy:
Check
− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V
voltage supply),
Signal from sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) to pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353 pin
limit) and > 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad) (sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left B335) and
Remark:
The connected sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left must be end-of-line (EOL) compatible.
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, pad wear sensor B out of permitted value
range

Remedy:
Check
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3 sensor signal) and
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module, 2nd axle - output between voltage supply and
ground - should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is released).
These voltages are read out using MAN-cats I. The connected brake pad sensor must be end-of-line (EOL)
compatible.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 143

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, pressure sensor out of permitted value
range

Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353).
The pressure should be modulated by means of diagnosis (with MAN-cats I) and a comparison made with
external pressure gauge.
Check the supply lines to the pressure control module, 2nd axle.
(A402 pin X4/15) and
Y353 pin 6/1: Ground connection starting from EBS electronic control unit (A402 pin X4/6)
Exchange the defective pressure control module, 2nd axle.
Remark:
module, 2nd axle (Y353). If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange pressure
control module, 2nd axle.
These pressures are read out using MAN-cats I (not in event of fault).
The pressure sensor measuring range is 0 to 13 bar.
assignment.

The pressure control module, 2nd axle concerned is de-energised. The axle concerned is braked via the
pneumatic back-up circuit, even if a pressure control module is still intact. There is no automatic load-

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, time for inquiry "current pressure" too long

Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Check the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) for functioning. Exchange the
defective pressure control module, 2nd axle.
Check that the silencer for the pressure control module, 2nd axle has sufficient throughput.
Remark:
successful.
2nd axle (Y353). If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange pressure control
module, 2nd axle. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control
unit (A402) pin assignment.
8.11 - 144 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, poor ventilation

Remedy:
Check the vent holes (connection 3 for ventilation) of the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353).
Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, 2nd axle. Exchange the defective pressure
Remark:
If ventilation of the pressure control module, 2nd axle is hindered whilst the brake is being released, this
leads to incorrect measuring results.
A defective outlet valve or a defective pressure sensor in pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) can
trigger this fault message.
module, 2nd axle.
If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange pressure control module, 2nd axle.
These pressures are read out using MAN-cats I.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 145

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, excessive pressure during pulse test

Remedy:
function diagram.
Check the pneumatic connections for pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353), i.e.
− pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353/G67.303 connection 21) to combination cylinder - type 20/24
− pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353/G67.303 connection 4) to service brake valve (B337/G7.304
connection 22) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354/G67.303 connection 4) and
− the supply lines for pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353/G67.303 connection 1)

module, 2nd axle if it is not functioning.
Check the test pulse duration in the end-of-line (EOL) data memory using MAN-cats I.
Remark:
set pressure range.
- the pressure control module, 2nd axle is not functional.
These values are read out using MAN-cats I. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been
cleared, exchange the pressure control module, 2nd axle.
Emergency function:
8.11 - 146 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, residual pressure after braking

Remedy:
function diagram.
Check the pressure in connection 4 (pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353 connection 4) - service brake
valve (G7.304 connection 22) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354 connection 4)) of the back-up
circuit.

Remark:
- the pressure control module, 2nd axle is not functional or

T 61-A1 8.11 - 147

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, fault, pressure sensor without braking

Remedy:
function diagram.
Check the pressure in connection 4 (pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353 connection 4) - service brake
valve (G7.304 connection 22) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354 connection 4)) of the back-up
circuit.

Remark:

8.11 - 148 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, wheel sensor IC defective

Remedy:
Remark:
There is an internal pressure control module malfunction. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory
has been cleared, exchange the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353).
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, defective back-up valve, feedback

Remedy:
Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353). Exchange the defective
pressure control module, 2nd axle if it is not functioning.
Remark:
control module, 2nd axle. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared, exchange the
pressure control module, 2nd axle.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 149

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, defective inlet valve, feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, defective inlet and back-up valve, feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.

8.11 - 150 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, defective outlet valve, feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, front axle, left, defective outlet and back-up valve, feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 151

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, defective outlet and inlet valve, feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, defective outlet and inlet and back-up
valve, feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.

8.11 - 152 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, no CAN reception from module

Remedy:
The connections from the EBS control unit (A402) to the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y263)
− pin X4/6 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/1 (ground, pressure control module, 2nd axle);
− pin X4/15 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/2 (24V voltage supply, pressure control module, 2nd axle);
− pin X4/12 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/3 (CAN High for pressure control module, 2nd axle) and
− pin X4/9 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/4 (CAN Low for pressure control module, 2nd axle)
Check the plug connectors at the EBS electronic control unit and at the pressure control module, 2nd axle.
Measure the battery voltage (24V) from A402 pin X4/15 (voltage supply Y353) to A402 pin X4/6 (ground
Y353). Next determine the total resistance of 64Ω from A402 pin X4/12 (CAN High Y353) to A402 pin X4/9
(CAN Low Y353).
Also check the ground connections for all connected pressure control modules (pressure control module,
front axle, left (Y263), pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262), pressure control module, 2nd axle
(Y353) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354)).
Remark: Brake CAN

CAN High 2.5 V
CAN High 3.5 V
assignment. Also check the ground signal (resistance < 1Ω) from A402 pin X1/12 (ground, pressure control
module input) to X618 (distributor, terminal board X102, line 31000) and the battery voltage (24V) of the
EBS control unit (A402) from A402 pin X1/8 (voltage supply, terminal 30) to X618 (distributor, terminal
board X102, line 31000).

T 61-A1 8.11 - 153

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, software incompatibility between control

Remedy:
Exchange the EBS electronic control unit (A402) or the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) for one
with compatible software version.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, 12/24 volt incompatibility between control

Remedy:
with compatible voltage version.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, high cycle protection, inlet valve active,
pressure < 4 bar

Remedy:
The status "high cycle protection" is achieved when the pressure sensor in the pressure control module,
2nd axle (Y353) does not reach the required desired pressure. After a time the inlet valve is then activated
Check the functioning of the pressure control module, 2nd axle. Exchange the defective pressure control
Also check free passage in the pneumatic supply lines to the pressure control modules (pressure control
module, front axle, left (Y263), pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262), pressure control module,
2nd axle (Y353) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354)).
(pressure sensor for supply pressure - installed in pressure control module, 2nd axle)).
8.11 - 154 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
supply pressure.
The current pressure sensor values are read out from the pressure control module using MAN-cats I.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, arithmetic test not successful

Remedy:
Remark:
2nd axle (Y353).


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Check the tyre sizes on the front and both the rear axles.
Press the ASR shut-off button for a distance of at least 10 km at a speed of more than 25 km/h. Check
lamp, ASR info. (appears as icon on the display) flashes.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 155

DIAGNOSIS
Remark:
The ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121) forwards this information to the EBS control unit. This malfunction
check lamps for early warning (yellow) (H214) and tractor ABS (H139) and the fault is stored in the EBS
control unit.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
Remark:
The ABS sensor forwards this information to the EBS control unit. This malfunction occurs when the
warning (yellow) (H214) and tractor ABS (H139) and the fault is stored in the EBS control unit. If
compensation causes the difference in wheel speeds to fall below < 9%, faultless operation is possible until
the next deactivation. However, the fault remains in the fault memory. The compensated wheel diameter is
output until the maximum permitted difference which is stored in the end of line (EOL) is reached (e.g.
25%).

8.11 - 156 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, fault, voltage supply, axle load sensor

Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) and the ALB
sensor, 2nd axle (B503) for short-circuits and line breaks:
− between pin 3/4 (pressure control module, 2nd axle) and pin 1 (voltage supply, ALB sensor, 2nd axle),
− between pin 3/1 (pressure control module, 2nd axle) and pin 2 (ground, ALB sensor, 2nd axle),
− between pin 3/3 (pressure control module, 2nd axle) and pin 3 (signal line, ALB sensor, 2nd axle),
Remark:
Permitted supply voltage range at pressure control module, 2nd axle:
The voltage measured at the pressure control module, 2nd axle between pin 3/4 and Pin 3/1 should be 5V
± 0.45V. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, left, pressure differential on pressure control

Remedy:
Check the functioning of the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353). Exchange the defective pressure
control module, 2nd axle if it is not functioning.
Check free passage in the pneumatic supply lines to pressure control module, 2nd axle (connection 1).
Remark:
The current pressure sensor values are read out from pressure control module, 2nd axle using MAN-cats I.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 157

DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right; interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between pressure control module, 2nd axle and ABS sensor, right
for line breaks or short-circuits.
Remark:
is measured at the ABS sensor, right. Line breaks are indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp for
tractor ABS (H139).
After the fault is rectified, the check lamp for tractor ABS goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is
assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, wheel sensor A: Deceleration excessive

Remedy:
Remark:
The sensor resistance should be between 950Ω and 1930Ω. This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS
sensor, right fails abruptly and v > 30km/h and if there is a short-circuit between two ABS sensor lines and
ABS sensor, right has fallen out of its fixture.
assignment.

8.11 - 158 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, wheel sensor A: Starting-off fault

Remedy:
Remark:
The wheel speeds and the limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I. There are differences in the tyre

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, wheel sensor A: Excessive clearance

Remedy:
Check the clearance between ABS sensor, right and the rotor.
Slide the ABS sensor into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 159

DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, perpetual control, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Remark:
of ABS intervention. The wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I. There are differences in
(v > 20 km/h) is measured at all ABS sensors (memory function). Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram
for the component and EBS electronic control unit (A402) pin assignment.

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, long instability, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Remark:
diameter due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded. After the
8.11 - 160 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Remark:
due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated must not be exceeded.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 161

DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Remark:


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right; interrupt, short-circuit, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
2nd axle, right (B122) for line breaks or short-circuits
Remark:
pin 5/2 to pin 5/1). This fault is indicated if a voltage < 1V or > 4V is measured at ABS sensor, 2nd axle,
right. Line breaks are indicated immediately by the yellow check lamp for tractor ABS (H139).
After the fault is rectified, the check lamp for tractor ABS goes out if a sufficient signal (v > 20 km/h) is
assignment.

the defective ABS sensor (2nd axle, right) is treated as if it were running unlocked on the road with high
8.11 - 162 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, wheel sensor B: Deceleration excessive

Remedy:
Remark:
pin 5/2 to pin 5/1). This fault is indicated if the signal for ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right fails abruptly and
v > 30 km/h and if there is a short-circuit between two ABS sensor lines and ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right
has fallen out of its fixture.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, wheel sensor B: Starting-off fault

Remedy:
Slide ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122) into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
There is excessive clearance between ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right and the rotor.
due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated (0.8 - 1.2) must not be exceeded. After the

T 61-A1 8.11 - 163

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, wheel sensor B: Excessive clearance

Remedy:
Check the clearance between ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122) and the rotor.
Slide ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
due to mixed-profile tyres and wear. The limit values indicated (0.8 - 1.2) must not be exceeded. After the
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, perpetual control, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
Remark:
but the wheel cannot be stabilised (perpetual control). Controlled wheels are monitored during anti-lock
braking system (ABS) control. The wheel speed and limit gap are read out using MAN-cats I. There are
assignment.
8.11 - 164 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, long instability, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors to ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122) for line breaks, short-circuits

Remark:
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 165

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, pulse ring fault, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.

the defective ABS sensor (2nd axle, right) (B122) is treated as if it were running unlocked on the road with

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, fault on lifting axle, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
Remark:

the defective ABS sensor (2nd axle, right) (B122) is treated as if it were running unlocked on the road with
8.11 - 166 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, fault, voltage supply, pad wear sensor

Check
supply),
− the cables and plug connectors starting from pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) to sensor, brake
pad, 2nd axle, right
− sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right itself and the sensor ground connection (pin 1: Ground).
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, pad wear sensor A out of permitted value
range

Remedy:
Check
− the 5V line to sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334) for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 4: 5V
voltage supply),
Signal from sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334) to pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353 pin
limit) and > 0.5V (approx. 2 seconds - new pad) (sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right B334) and
Remark:
These voltages are read out using MAN-cats I. The connected sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right must be
end-of-line (EOL) compatible.
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 167

DIAGNOSIS
SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, pad wear sensor B out of permitted value
range

Remedy:
Check
− the signal line to sensor, brake pad for line break, short-circuit or shunt (pin 3 sensor signal) and
Remark:
After braking, the 5V voltage at pressure control module, 2nd axle - output between voltage supply and
ground - should be 5V (± 0.45V) (approx. 2 seconds when the brake is released).
Voltages can be read out using MAN-cats I. The connected brake pad sensor must be end-of-line (EOL)
compatible. Refer to the EBS electrical wiring diagram for the component and EBS electronic control unit


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, pressure sensor out of permitted value
range

Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353). The
pressure should be modulated by means of diagnosis (with MAN-cats I) and a comparison made with
external pressure gauge.
Check the supply lines to the pressure control module, 2nd axle.
(A402 pin X4/15) and Y264 pin 6/1: Ground connection starting from EBS electronic control
unit (A402 pin X4/6)
Exchange the defective pressure control module, 2nd axle.
Remark:
module, 2nd axle (Y353). If this fault occurs repeatedly during normal operation, also exchange pressure
control module, 2nd axle. These pressures are read out using MAN-cats I (not in event of fault). The
pressure sensor measuring range is 0 to 13 bar.

8.11 - 168 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, time for inquiry "current pressure" too
long

Remedy:
Clear the fault memory. Check the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) for functioning. Exchange the
defective pressure control module, 2nd axle.
Check that the silencer for the pressure control module, 2nd axle has sufficient throughput.
Remark:
successful.
2nd axle (Y353).
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, poor ventilation

Remedy:
Check the vent holes (connection 3 for ventilation) of the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353).
Also check the functioning of the pressure control module, 2nd axle. Exchange the defective pressure
Remark:
If ventilation of the pressure control module, 2nd axle is hindered whilst the brake is being released, this
leads to incorrect measuring results.
A defective outlet valve or a defective pressure sensor in pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) can
trigger this fault message. There is an internal pressure control module malfunction or the pressure control
plausibility test is not successful. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been cleared,
exchange the pressure control module, 2nd axle.
These pressures are read out using MAN-cats I.
assignment.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 169

DIAGNOSIS


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, excessive pressure during pulse test

Remedy:
function diagram.

Check the test pulse duration in the end-of-line (EOL) data memory using MAN-cats I.
Remark:
set pressure range.
- the pressure control module, 2nd axle is not functional.
These values are read out using MAN-cats I. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory has been
cleared, exchange the pressure control module, 2nd axle.
Emergency function:
8.11 - 170 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, residual pressure after braking

Remedy:
function diagram.
Check the pressure in connection 4 (pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353/G67.303 connection 4) -
service brake valve (B337/G7.304 connection 22) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354/G67.303

Remark:

T 61-A1 8.11 - 171

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, fault, pressure sensor without braking

Remedy:
function diagram.
Check the pressure in connection 4 (pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353/G67.303 connection 4) -
service brake valve (B337/G7.304 connection 22) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354/G67.303

Remark:

8.11 - 172 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, wheel sensor IC defective

Remedy:
Remark:
There is an internal pressure control module malfunction. If the fault occurs again after the fault memory
has been cleared, exchange the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353).
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, defective back-up valve, feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 173

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, defective inlet valve, feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, defective inlet and back-up valve,
feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.

8.11 - 174 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, defective outlet valve, feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, defective outlet and back-up valve,
feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 175

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, defective outlet and inlet valve, feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, defective outlet and inlet and back-up
valve, feedback

Remedy:
Remark:
assignment.

8.11 - 176 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, no CAN reception from module

Remedy:
The connections from the EBS control unit (A402) to the pressure control module, rear axle (Y264)
− pin X4/6 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/1 (ground, pressure control module, 2nd axle);
− pin X4/15 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/2 (24V voltage supply, pressure control module, 2nd axle);
− pin X4/12 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/3 (CAN High for pressure control module, 2nd axle) and
− pin X4/9 (control unit, EBS) - pin 6/4 (CAN Low for pressure control module, 2nd axle)
Check the plug connectors at the EBS electronic control unit and at the pressure control module, 2nd axle.
Measure the battery voltage (24V) from A402 pin X4/15 (voltage supply Y353) to A402 pin X4/6 (ground
Y353). Next determine the total resistance of 64Ω from A402 pin X4/12 (CAN High Y353) to A402 pin X4/9
(CAN Low Y353).
Also check the ground connections for all connected pressure control modules (pressure control module,
front axle, left (Y263), pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262), pressure control module, 2nd axle
(Y353) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354)).
Remark: Brake CAN

CAN High 2.5 V
CAN High 3.5 V
assignment. Also check the ground signal (resistance < 1Ω) from A402 pin X1/12 (ground, pressure control
module input) to X618 (distributor, terminal board X102, line 31000) and the battery voltage (24V) of the
EBS control unit (A402) from A402 pin X1/8 (voltage supply, terminal 30) to X618 (distributor, terminal
board X102, line 31000).


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, software incompatibility between control

Remedy:
with compatible software version.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 177

DIAGNOSIS


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, 12/24 volt incompatibility between control

Remedy:
with compatible voltage version.


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, high cycle protection, inlet valve active,
pressure < 4 bar

Remedy:
The status "high cycle protection" is achieved when the pressure sensor in the pressure control module,
2nd axle does not reach the required desired pressure. After a time the inlet valve is then activated
Also check free passage in the pneumatic supply lines to the pressure control modules (pressure control
module, front axle, left (Y263), pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262), pressure control module,
2nd axle (Y353) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354)).
(pressure sensor for supply pressure - installed in pressure control module, 2nd axle)).
Remark:
supply pressure. Check the reservoir pressure in circuits 1 and 2.
The current pressure sensor values are read out from the pressure control module using MAN-cats I.

8.11 - 178 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, arithmetic test not successful

Remedy:
Remark:
2nd axle (Y353).

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor A

Remedy:
Remark:
warning (yellow) (H214) and tractor ABS (H139) and the fault is stored in the EBS control unit.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 179

DIAGNOSIS

SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, wheel adjustment fault, wheel sensor B

Remedy:
Remark:
The ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122) forwards this information to the EBS control unit. This malfunction
check lamps for early warning (yellow) (H214) and tractor ABS (H139) and the fault is stored in the EBS
control unit. If compensation causes the difference in wheel speeds to fall below < 9%, faultless operation
is possible until the next deactivation. However, the fault remains in the fault memory. The compensated
wheel diameter is output until the maximum permitted difference which is stored in the end of line (EOL) is
reached (e.g. 25%).


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, fault, voltage supply, axle load sensor

Remedy:
Check the cables and plug connectors between the pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353) and the ALB
sensor, 2nd axle (B503) for short-circuits and line breaks:
− between pin 3/4 (pressure control module, 2nd axle) and pin 1 (voltage supply, ALB sensor, 2nd axle),
− between pin 3/1 (pressure control module, 2nd axle) and pin 2 (ground, ALB sensor, 2nd axle),
− between pin 3/3 (pressure control module, 2nd axle) and pin 3 (signal line, ALB sensor, 2nd axle),
Remark:
Permitted supply voltage range at pressure control module, 2nd axle:
The voltage measured at the pressure control module, 2nd axle between pin 3/4 and Pin 3/1 should be
5V ± 0.45V.
assignment.
8.11 - 180 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS


SPN plain text: Pressure control module, centre axle, right, pressure differential on pressure control

Remedy:
Check free passage in the pneumatic supply lines (connection 1) to pressure control module, 2nd axle.
Remark:
The current pressure sensor values are read out from pressure control module, 2nd axle using MAN-cats I.

T 61-A1 8.11 - 181

DIAGNOSIS
The following individually documented fault codes are faults that are not stored in the fault memory of the
EBS electronic control unit (A402).
− Display text indication: EBS control unit not connected to the cable harness
Remedy:
After the ignition switch is actuated, check that the voltage is connected at terminal 15 (pin X1/7) of the
EBS control unit (A402) (desired value: 20 ... 32V).
Remark:
An switch integrated in the cable harness plug connector (pin X1/15) switches on the red warning lamp by
closing contacts X1/12 and X1/18 on the cable harness side as soon as the cable harness is not connected
or drops out due to loosening (connector drop-out detection).
If the internal conductor line fuse in the EBS control unit has been destroyed, the defective EBS control unit
has to be exchanged.
assignment.

The EBS system is de-energised. Braking is via the pneumatic back-up circuit. The system has no
automatic load-dependent brake (ALB), anti-lock braking system (ABS), anti-spin regulator (ASR) (brake
and engine controller) and coupling force control (KKR).
− Display text indication: ASR active (brake and/or engine controller)
In this case, the check lamps are not stored. Also cannot be used for on-board diagnosis.
Check lamp, ASR info. (appears as icon on the display)
Check lamp, ASR info. (H140) lights up yellow
8.11 - 182 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
− 3 seconds after the ignition is switched "ON"
In this case, the check lamps are not stored. Also cannot be used for on-board diagnosis.
Check lamp: All check lamps, including, e.g.:

For buses and coaches A20, A21, A22, A23, A24, A25, A26, A30 and A35:
- Check lamp, tractor ABS (H139),
- Check lamp, spring actuator, reservoir (H270),
- Central STOP warning light (H111),
- Check lamp, tractor ABS (H139),
- Check lamp, general brake check (H108),
- Check lamp, ASR info. (H140),
- Check lamp, brake pad wear (H373),
- Central STOP warning light (H111),
- Check lamp, ASR info. (H140),
- Check lamp tractor/trailer ABS (H107)
- Check lamp, general brake check (H108) light up
Remark:
If no faults are detected, all check lamps go out again after approx. 3 seconds.
− Display text indication: Wear, brake pads

Remedy:
Check the brake pads for wear and exchange them if necessary.
Check the cables and plug connections for short-circuits and line breaks.
For buses and coaches A04, A25, A26, A30 and A32:
− Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, left (B333) and pressure control module, front axle, left (Y263),
− Sensor, brake pad, 1st axle, right (B332) and pressure control module, front axle, right (Y262),
− Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) and pressure control module, rear axle (Y264),
− Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334) and pressure control module, rear axle (Y264),
− Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) and pressure control module, rear axle (Y264),
− Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388) and pressure control module, rear axle (Y264);
− Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) and pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353),
− Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334) and pressure control module, 2nd axle (Y353),
− Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, left (B389) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354),
− Sensor, brake pad, 3rd axle, right (B388) and pressure control module, 3rd axle (Y354);
For buses and coaches A01, A03, A13, A20, A21, A22, A33, A35, R02 and R03:
− Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, left (B335) and pressure control module, rear axle (Y264),
− Sensor, brake pad, 2nd axle, right (B334) and pressure control module, rear axle (Y264),
Remark:
The current wear degree values are read out using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. A malfunction based on pad
wear sensor feedback has no adverse effects on faultless operation of the electronic brake system
whatsoever.
T 61-A1 8.11 - 183

DIAGNOSIS
− Pseudo code: 03512

(Priority: 2)
Indication on display: OBD, request, red warning lamp during diagnosis
The red warning light is activated by means of diagnosis.
Remark:
After the EBS electronic control unit (A402) is reset, the check lamp for spring actuator reservoir or general
brake check is deactivated.

(Priority: 5)
Indication on display: OBD, request, yellow warning lamp during diagnosis
CAN J 1939 message EEC 1: Request from the driver or actual torque; the values are out of the valid
range.
The diagnosis software was written on EEPROM using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
The yellow warning light was activated using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II.
Remark:
After the EBS electronic control unit (A402) is reset, the yellow check lamp is deactivated.

(Priority: 5)
Indication on display: OBD, signal, brake pad wear sensor
The brake pad wear is out of the valid range. The left/right wear difference is too great; the brake pad wear
sensor has a supply fault.
The brake pad wear indicator check lamp was activated by means of diagnosis (MAN-cats I/MAN-cats II).
8.11 - 184 T 61-A1

DIAGNOSIS
Remark: ---

(Priority: 2)
Indication on display: OBD, voltage too high or too low
Remedy:
After the ignition is switched on, check the connection of the voltage at terminal 15 (pin X1/7) and the
voltage at terminal 30 (pin X1/8) of the EBS control unit (A402) (desired values for both voltage values:
20 ... 32V).
Remark:
If the internal conductor line fuse in the EBS control unit has been destroyed, the defective EBS control unit
has to be exchanged.
assignment.

The EBS control unit and pressure control module are energised, all sensor signals are processed.
Communication is maintained between the pressure control module and EBS control unit. Solenoid valves
remain in the basic position. They are not electrically activated. Braking is via the pneumatic back-up circuit
(without automatic load-dependent brake (ALB), anti-lock braking system (ABS), anti-spin regulator (ASR)
and coupling force control (KKR).

(Priority: 5)
Indication on display: OBD, wheel speed sensor, fault during last switch-on cycle

Remark:
After the fault has been remedied and the fault memory has been cleared, the two check lamps are
deactivated as soon as a sufficient signal (wheel speed > 20 km/h) has been transmitted by all ABS
sensors (ABS sensor, 1st axle, left (B119), ABS sensor, 1st axle, right (B120), ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left
(B121) and ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122); for buses and coaches A23 and A24, also ABS sensor,
3rd axle, left (B223) and ABS sensor, 3rd axle, right (B224)) (memory function).
T 61-A1 8.11 - 185

DIAGNOSIS

(Priority: 3)
Indication on display: OBD, limit gap speed, warning level, repeated every second

Remedy:
Check the ABS sensor limit gap values using MAN-cats I or MAN-cats II. Slide the appropriate ABS sensor
into position by hand (do not strike!).
Remark:
The limit gap speed of one or several ABS sensors (ABS sensor, 1st axle, left (B119), ABS sensor, 1st
axle, right (B120), ABS sensor, 2nd axle, left (B121) and ABS sensor, 2nd axle, right (B122); for buses
and coaches A23 and A24, also ABS sensor, 3rd axle, left (B223) and ABS sensor, 3rd axle, right (B224))
is between 8 and 10 km/h.

(Priority: 5)
Indication on display: OBD, chassis dynamometer mode active
Check lamp, ASR info. (appears as icon on the display)
Check lamp, ASR info. (H140) lights up yellow
Remark:
Pressing the ASR shut-off button activates the anti-spin regulator (ASR) Off Road Mode.
This mode is deactivated when
− the vehicle is moved or
− the EBS electronic control unit (A402) is reset.
8.11 - 186 T 61-A1

T61-A1 1 EBS 2 Knorr BUS 81992984452 ENG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

T61-A1 1 EBS 2 Knorr BUS 81992984452 ENG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats



Publication no.: System Description

MAN Nutzfahrzeuge Aktiengesellschaft Elektrische Anlage Omnibus

Electronic Brake System (EBS)

We reserve the right to make modifications in the course of further development

 2002 MAN Nutzfahrzeuge Aktiengesellschaft

VSWY / HA 04.2002 Übersetzung + Satz: emes GmbH

Functional description ................................................................................................................. 3

Wiring diagram, EBS A03/A13/A33.............................................................................................. 6.22 - 2

Function diagrams ....................................................................................................................... 7

Table of contents.......................................................................................................................... 0.11 - 1

Abbreviations As of: 11.01

CAN Controller area network

DAHL Roof ventilator

DIAK Diagnosis, K-line (data line)

EBS Electronic brake system

FAP Driver's area

FMR Vehicle/engine management

GDK Controlled diesel catalytic converter

IBEL Interior lighting

KBZ Combination brake cylinder

LBH Air reservoir

M-TCO Modular EU tachograph

OBDU On-board diagnostic unit

UBat Battery voltage

Regulations for preventing accidents leading to injury to personnel.

• Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rolling away.

• Only authorised personnel are permitted to start and operate an engine.

• Always disconnect the batteries before working on the electrical system.

• If paint spraying is to be carried out, do not expose the electronic components

Plastic tubes (polyamide)

Limited liability for accessories and parts

Attachments and special bodies

Taking out of operation or putting into storage

Electronic Brake System (EBS)

Explanation of the subfunctions

Features of EBS for buses and coaches

Operation of the subfunctions

Braking with the service brake system

Electronically controlled braking (EPB)

Braking via back-up circuit

− the ignition switch is in "off" position.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)

ABS during electro-pneumatic brake operation (EPB with electrical setpoint)

ABS and sustained-action brake (if fitted)

Control process for vehicles-ABS

− Individual control (IR)

Individual control (IR)

Modified individual control (IRM)

Select-low control (SL)

Select-smart control (SSM)

Anti-spin regulator (ASR)

ASR engine controller

Communication with the engine control unit

Automatic tyre compensation

ASR brake controller

− Electronic control unit

− Brake power sensor

− Pressure control module (1-channel)

− Pressure control module (2-channel)

− Speed sensing system

− Brake wear sensor

− ALB sensor, rear axle/centre axle and rear axle